User's Guide

This guide describes total operation features

and specifications.

Series
061-360UG-EN3
Options and functions vary depending on the model.

ComColor GD9630/GD9630R
ComColor GD9631/GD9631R
ComColor GD7330/GD7330R

Feed Tray (1,2 and 3) ✓ N/A*

Connectivity of the Wrapping

✓ N/A
Envelope Finisher (optional)

✓: Available
N/A: Not available

* The [Mixed Size Original], [Add Cover], [Slip Sheet], and [Paper Tray Relay] functions in Copy mode,
Print mode, and Storage mode are not available. The [Multi-part Paper Printing] function of the printer
driver is not available. The [Mixed Size Original] function in Scan mode is available only for reading.

This device is compliant with the substance emission

inspections of the German environmental label "RAL-UZ171".

CAUTION
After reading this guide, keep it handy for future reference.
The "Safety Precautions" are provided in the supplemental
Safety Information. Be sure to read through them prior to use.

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

About This Guide

Preface

Thank you for your purchase of a ComColor GD Series product.

This ComColor GD Series product is a network-compatible inkjet printer that performs high-speed color printing.
This machine uses five colors of ink, cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and gray, to enable smooth expression of
gradations while improving the reproduction of highlights and density of black in color printing. Besides output
of data and management of the printer from a computer, this machine can be used in combination with an
optional scanner for various functions such as copying originals and saving or utilizing scanned data.
The five guides described below are supplied with this machine.
● Quick Guide
This guide describes basic machine operations and how to replace consumables.
Keep this guide handy, such as near the machine, for easy reference.
Start by reading this guide.
● User's Guide (this guide)
This guide describes handling precautions and specifications, as well as the operations and settings of each
function.
Read this guide for a more detailed understanding of the machine.
● Administrator's Guide
This guide describes the machine settings and optional equipment to be configured by the administrator.
● Troubleshooting Guide
This guide describes the actions to take when a paper jam or other problem occurs.
● Safety Information
This guide describes safety precautions and specifications.

About This Guide

(1) This guide may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to product improvements.
(3) RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION shall not be liable for any consequence of using this guide or the machine.
Trademark Credits
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
ColorSet is a trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc. registered in the U.S. Patent & Trademark Office and may be
registered in certain jurisdictions.
FeliCa is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
Mifare is a registered trademark of Royal Philips Electronics.
, , ComColor, and FORCEJET are trademarks or registered trademarks of RISO KAGAKU
CORPORATION in the United States and other countries.
Other corporate names and/or trademarks are either registered trademarks or trademarks of each company,
respectively.
Acquisition of Color Universal Design Certification
The ComColor GD series (machine and optional equipment*) are certified for being
manufactured in consideration of Color Universal Design, which improves visibility for more
people regardless of individual differences in color perception, by the Color Universal Design
Organization (CUDO).
* Certified optional equipment:
Scanner / Face down finisher / High capacity feeder / High capacity stacker

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Symbols, Notations, and Screenshots Used in This Guide
■ Symbols Used in This Guide

Indicates cautions that should be noted for safe use of this machine.

Indicates important items that should be noted or are prohibited.

Indicates useful or additional information.

■ Names of Keys and Buttons

The names of hard keys on the operation panel and buttons on the touch panel screen or computer window are
indicated with square brackets [ ].

● Operation Panel ● Touch Panel Screen ● Computer Window

Example: Press the [Stop] key. Example: Touch [Color Mode].

Example: Select the [Mixed Size

Original] check box.

■ Names of Optional Equipment

In this guide, the names of the optional equipment are described using a generic term as shown below. The specific
name for each item of equipment is used when its unique features are explained.

Name Used in This Guide Optional Equipment

Standard Tray High capacity feeder
Stacking tray* Auto-control stacking tray
Wide stacking tray
High capacity stacker
* Optional stacking tray connected to the right side of the machine.

■ Illustrations and Operating Procedures in This Guide

• The operating procedures, screenshots, and illustrations in this guide are for the ComColor GD9630/GD9630R with
the optional scanner connected. This guide also assumes that each function is set to the factory setting, and that
[Login Setting] is set to [ON].
• The screenshots and illustrations in this guide may vary depending on the machine model and usage environment,
including the connected optional equipment.

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Functions Made Possible by Installing Optional
Equipment
A variety of optional equipment is available to expand the functionality of this machine.
The list below shows the optional equipment that is required to expand each function.

Function to Expand Optional Equipment Required (one of the following)

Staple Face down finisher
Multifunction finisher
Punch Multifunction finisher
Bi-fold Multifunction finisher
Tri-fold, Z-fold Multifunction finisher with the folder unit installed
Creating the booklets with saddle stitch stapling Multifunction finisher
Offset output Face down finisher
High capacity stacker
Multifunction finisher
Output tray selection Auto-control stacking tray
Wide stacking tray
High capacity stacker
Multifunction finisher
Automatic switching of output tray (output tray relay) Auto-control stacking tray
High capacity stacker
Multifunction finisher
High capacity feeding High capacity feeder
High capacity stacking High capacity stacker
Printing, enveloping, and sealing enveloped mail Wrapping Envelope Finisher
Perfect binding Perfect Binder
Login with authentication card IC card authentication kit
IC card reader activation kit
Printing with PostScript 3 printer driver PS kit
Print controller
Printing PDF files saved on USB flash drive PS kit
Printing from Mac OS PS kit
Print controller
Printing from tablet or smartphone using RISO PRINT- PS kit
S application

PS Kit FG10 is not supported in some regions.

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 What You Can Do With This Machine
Re-order Pages and Print Check the results before printing large amounts
Combine (p. 1-15, p. 3-15), Image Repeat (p. 1-16, Sample Copy (p. 1-32), Print and Pause (p. 3-10)
p. 3-16), Booklet (p. 1-16, p. 3-16)
You can print one sample and check the results and
You can combine multiple pages to be placed on a settings.
single page or print data after laying out several sets
of data for a single page. You can also re-order the
pages to be in the correct order when the printed
sheets are folded into two.

Quickly sort large amounts of documents Copy the original of an open booklet

Sort (p. 1-11, p. 3-10), Book Shadow Erasure (p. 1-13, p. 2-9),
Separation, Slip Sheet (p. 1-27, p. 3-22) Page Split (p. 1-14, p. 2-9)
In order to quickly sort large amounts of documents, Remove shadows that appear in the center of images
you can print each set at a time or insert a sheet when an open book is scanned. You can also copy
between each set to serve as a guide. the pages from an open book and split the image into
two pages.

Register and retrieve settings Improving readability of originals with a dark background

Favorite Shortcuts (p. 16) Base Color Level (p. 1-22, p. 2-10)
You can registers shortcuts for your favorite functions You can adjust the background color of the original to
on the [Home2] screen. This will enable you to bring improve readability of text.
up your favorite settings without moving to each
mode.

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Create multiple-page forms Composing images and text onto originals

Multi-part Paper Printing (p. 3-30) Stamp (p. 1-17, p. 3-18), Overlay (p. 1-23),
Watermark (p. 3-17)
You can prepare multiple-page forms consisting of
multiple pages that form a single set. You can print documents upon adding page
numbers, dates, text, stamps, or other transparent
patterns onto originals. In addition, you can also
make copies upon layering an image that has been
saved on the storage.

Protect documents with a PIN code Print the number of copies of the number of sets needed

PIN Code (p. 2-9, p. 3-28) Program (p. 1-24, p. 3-28)

You can set a PIN code for scanned documents and Even in cases when the number of copies differ
print jobs. This will allow only certain people to depending on where the document will be distributed,
process the document or job. you can quickly print the number of copies of the
number of sets needed without the need for settings
each time by configuring such information in
advance.

Coordination with external servers and systems Correct color balance

External System Link (p. 3-36) Gamma Correction (p. 1-21, p. 2-10, p. 3-25)
It is possible to authenticate users with an external Corrects the balance of colors the original contains to
server and limit the use of this machine and also print bring colors closer to natural shades.
documents that have been saved on an external
system.

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Contents

About This Guide ................................................................................................1

Symbols, Notations, and Screenshots Used in This Guide ........................... 2
Functions Made Possible by Installing Optional Equipment ......................... 3
What You Can Do With This Machine ...............................................................4
Part Names and Functions ...............................................................................12
Main Unit and Optional Scanner ................................................................. 12
Operation Panel .......................................................................................... 14
Touch Panel .......................................................................................................15
[Home1] Screen .......................................................................................... 15
[Home2] Screen .......................................................................................... 16
Mode Screens ............................................................................................. 17
Touch Panel ................................................................................................ 27
Preparation ........................................................................................................29
Power .......................................................................................................... 29
Login ........................................................................................................... 30
Loading the Paper ....................................................................................... 31
Installing the Printer Driver ..............................................................................35
Operating Environment ............................................................................... 35
Installing ...................................................................................................... 35
About Jobs ........................................................................................................36
[Active / Idle] Screen ................................................................................... 36
[Finished] Screen ........................................................................................ 37

Chapter 1 Copying ...................................................................................1-1

Overview of Copy Operations ..............................................................1-2
Procedure .................................................................................................. 1-2
List of Settings ........................................................................................... 1-5
Copy Settings ........................................................................................1-7
Color Mode ................................................................................................ 1-7
Reproduction Size ...................................................................................... 1-7
Paper Selection .......................................................................................... 1-8
Scanning Size .......................................................................................... 1-10
Original Orientation .................................................................................. 1-10
Duplex / Simplex ...................................................................................... 1-11
Sort .......................................................................................................... 1-11
Scanning Level ........................................................................................ 1-12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Print Density ............................................................................................. 1-12
ADF Scan & Pause .................................................................................. 1-12
Mixed Size Original .................................................................................. 1-13
Book Shadow Erasure ............................................................................. 1-13
Page Split ................................................................................................. 1-14
Combine ................................................................................................... 1-15
Image Repeat .......................................................................................... 1-16
Booklet ..................................................................................................... 1-16
Stamp ....................................................................................................... 1-17
Page Border ............................................................................................. 1-19
Image Quality ........................................................................................... 1-20
Original Type ............................................................................................ 1-20
Gamma Correction ................................................................................... 1-21
Image Control .......................................................................................... 1-21
Base Color Level ...................................................................................... 1-22
Image Position ......................................................................................... 1-22
Overlay ..................................................................................................... 1-23
Program ................................................................................................... 1-24
Add Cover ................................................................................................ 1-27
Separation ................................................................................................ 1-27
Binding Margin ......................................................................................... 1-28
Staple/Punch ............................................................................................ 1-29
Fold .......................................................................................................... 1-29
Slow Printing ............................................................................................ 1-29
Output Tray .............................................................................................. 1-29
Face Up/Down ......................................................................................... 1-29
Output Tray Relay .................................................................................... 1-29
Paper Tray Relay ..................................................................................... 1-30
Auto Image Rotation ................................................................................ 1-30
Interrupt Copy .......................................................................................... 1-30
Copy Mode Function Buttons ............................................................1-31
Favorites .................................................................................................. 1-31
Additional Copy ........................................................................................ 1-31
Sample Copy ........................................................................................... 1-32
Check Setting ........................................................................................... 1-32
Custom Menu ........................................................................................... 1-33

Chapter 2 Scanning .................................................................................2-1

Overview of Scan Operations ..............................................................2-2
Procedure .................................................................................................. 2-2
List of Settings ........................................................................................... 2-5
Scan Settings ........................................................................................2-6
Document Name ........................................................................................ 2-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Color Mode ................................................................................................ 2-7
Scanning Size ............................................................................................ 2-7
File Format ................................................................................................. 2-7
Duplex / Simplex ........................................................................................ 2-8
Scanning Level .......................................................................................... 2-8
Original Orientation .................................................................................... 2-8
Resolution .................................................................................................. 2-8
Mixed Size Original .................................................................................... 2-9
Page Size ................................................................................................... 2-9
Book Shadow Erasure ............................................................................... 2-9
Page Split ................................................................................................... 2-9
PIN code .................................................................................................... 2-9
Original Type ............................................................................................ 2-10
Gamma Correction ................................................................................... 2-10
Image Control .......................................................................................... 2-10
Base Color Level ...................................................................................... 2-10
Reproduction Size .................................................................................... 2-10
Scan Mode Function Buttons ............................................................2-11
Favorites .................................................................................................. 2-11
Check Setting ........................................................................................... 2-11
Preview before sending ........................................................................... 2-11
Custom Menu ........................................................................................... 2-12

Chapter 3 Printing ....................................................................................3-1

Overview of Print Operations ..............................................................3-2
Procedure From the Printer Driver ............................................................. 3-2
Procedure From Print Mode ....................................................................... 3-3
Printer Driver Screen .................................................................................. 3-5
List of Settings ........................................................................................... 3-6
Printer Driver Settings ..........................................................................3-9
[Basic] Tab ................................................................................................. 3-9
[Favorites] Tab ......................................................................................... 3-14
[Layout] Tab ............................................................................................. 3-15
[Finishing] Tab ......................................................................................... 3-20
[Image] Tab .............................................................................................. 3-24
[Advanced] Tab ........................................................................................ 3-28
[Environment] Tab .................................................................................... 3-31
Print Mode Function Buttons .............................................................3-35
View Selection ......................................................................................... 3-35
Online/Offline ........................................................................................... 3-35
Select All .................................................................................................. 3-35
Details ...................................................................................................... 3-35
Change Setting ........................................................................................ 3-35

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 External System Link ............................................................................... 3-36

Chapter 4 Storage ....................................................................................4-1

Overview of Storage Operations .........................................................4-2
Saving the Data to a Folder ....................................................................... 4-2
Printing a Document in a Folder ................................................................. 4-4
List of Settings in [Storage] - [Save] ........................................................... 4-5
List of Settings in [Storage] - [Load] ........................................................... 4-7
Storage Mode Function Buttons .........................................................4-8
Function Buttons in [Storage] - [Save] ....................................................... 4-8
Function Buttons in [Storage] - [Load] ..................................................... 4-10

Chapter 5 USB ..........................................................................................5-1

Overview of USB Operations ...............................................................5-2
Saving the Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive ........................................ 5-2
Printing a Document Saved on a USB Flash Drive .................................... 5-3
List of Settings in [USB] - [Save] ................................................................ 5-5
List of Settings in [USB] - [Load] ................................................................ 5-6
USB Mode Function Buttons ...............................................................5-7
Function Buttons in [USB] - [Save] ............................................................. 5-7
Function Buttons in [USB] - [Load] ............................................................. 5-8

Chapter 6 RISO Console..........................................................................6-1

Overview of the RISO Console ............................................................6-2
Top Screen ................................................................................................ 6-2
Starting the RISO Console ......................................................................... 6-4
Common Button Operations ....................................................................... 6-5
[System Info] Menu ...............................................................................6-6
[Consumables] Screen ............................................................................... 6-6
[Machine Info] Screen ................................................................................ 6-6
[User Info] Screen ...................................................................................... 6-7
[License Info] Screen ................................................................................. 6-8
[Scan] Menu ...........................................................................................6-9
[Scan] Menu Screen .................................................................................. 6-9
[Print] Menu .........................................................................................6-10
[Print] Menu Screen ................................................................................. 6-10
[Storage] Menu ....................................................................................6-11
[Load] Screen ........................................................................................... 6-11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 [Job Status] Menu ...............................................................................6-12
[Active / Idle] Screen ................................................................................ 6-12
[Finished] Screen ..................................................................................... 6-12
[Maintenance] Menu ...........................................................................6-13
[Maintenance] Menu Screen .................................................................... 6-13

Chapter 7 Using the Barcode Area Definition Software .......................7-1

Overview of the Barcode Area Definition Software ...........................7-2
Installing the Barcode Area Definition Software ......................................... 7-2
Starting the Barcode Area Definition Software ........................................... 7-3
Main Screen ............................................................................................... 7-3
Creating and Registering a Barcode Area Definition File .................7-5
Procedure .................................................................................................. 7-5
Repetition Function .................................................................................... 7-8
Printing Barcode Originals ......................................................................... 7-8

Chapter 8 Optional Equipment ...............................................................8-1

Face Down Finisher ..............................................................................8-2
List of Settings ........................................................................................... 8-3
Printer Driver Settings ................................................................................ 8-4
Copy Mode Settings ................................................................................... 8-6
High Capacity Feeder ...........................................................................8-8
Loading the Paper ...................................................................................... 8-9
Adding the Paper ..................................................................................... 8-11
Stacking Tray (Auto-control Stacking Tray / Wide Stacking Tray)
..............................................................................................................8-13
Loading the Stacking Tray ....................................................................... 8-13
List of Settings ......................................................................................... 8-15
Printer Driver Settings .............................................................................. 8-16
Copy Mode Settings ................................................................................. 8-16
Maintenance Mode Settings .................................................................... 8-17
High Capacity Stacker ........................................................................8-18
Setting the Corrugators ............................................................................ 8-19
Removing Printouts .................................................................................. 8-19
Setting the Stacking Tray on the Carriage ............................................... 8-22
List of Settings ......................................................................................... 8-22
Printer Driver Settings .............................................................................. 8-23
Copy Mode Settings ................................................................................. 8-24
Maintenance Mode Settings .................................................................... 8-25

10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher ........................................................................8-26
List of Settings ......................................................................................... 8-27
Printer Driver Settings .............................................................................. 8-28
Copy Mode Settings ................................................................................. 8-35
PS Kit ...................................................................................................8-42
Operating Environment ............................................................................ 8-42
Installing to Windows ............................................................................... 8-42
Installing to Mac OS ................................................................................. 8-43
Installing to Linux ..................................................................................... 8-45
How to Print ............................................................................................. 8-46
Printer Driver Settings .............................................................................. 8-46
[Basic] Tab ............................................................................................... 8-47
[Favorites] Tab ......................................................................................... 8-48
[Layout] Tab ............................................................................................. 8-48
[Finishing] Tab ......................................................................................... 8-48
[Image] Tab .............................................................................................. 8-49
[Advanced] Tab ........................................................................................ 8-50
[Environment] Tab .................................................................................... 8-54
RISO Console Settings ............................................................................ 8-54
Printable Files in the USB Flash Drive ..................................................... 8-55
Font List ................................................................................................... 8-58

Chapter 9 Appendix .................................................................................9-1

Maintenance ..........................................................................................9-2
Print Head Cleaning ................................................................................... 9-2
Front Cover Release .................................................................................. 9-3
Paper Guide Control .................................................................................. 9-3
Glue Temperature ...................................................................................... 9-3
Maximum Pages per Mail ........................................................................... 9-3
About Ink Cartridges ............................................................................9-4
Ink Cartridge Replacement ........................................................................ 9-4
Specifications ........................................................................................9-5
Consumables ......................................................................................9-18
Ink Cartridges ........................................................................................... 9-18
Staple Cartridge ....................................................................................... 9-18
Index .....................................................................................................9-19

11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Part Names and Functions

Main Unit and Optional Scanner

A Scanner (Optional) E Face Down Tray

Use the scanner to copy or scan documents that are read Printouts are output face down.
from the platen glass or the ADF. F Standard Tray Descent Button
B Original Cover Use this button to move the standard tray up or down
Pull down to cover the original when reading it on the when replacing or adding the paper to it.
platen glass. G Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever
C Platen Glass Use this lever to adjust the paper feed pressure to suit
Set the original face down and aligned with the position the paper type in the standard tray.
of the arrow in the top left. H Standard Tray Paper Guide
D Scanner Lamp (Blue / Red) This guide prevents paper in the standard tray from
This lamp indicates the status of the scanner. becoming misaligned.
• Blue lamp ON: Ready I Standard Tray
• Blue lamp flashing: Machine is starting up or scanning Load special paper (thick paper, envelopes, etc.) here.
• Red lamp flashing: Error has occurred You can also load plain paper.

12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Part Names and Functions

J Main Power Switch

Use this switch to turn on the power. Usually the power is
left ON.
K Main Unit Socket
Connect the main unit power cable to this socket.
L Paper Feed Guide Levers
Use these levers to slide or fix the standard tray paper
guide. Levers are located on both sides of the standard
tray paper guide, in two places.
M Left Cover
Open this cover when there is a paper jam.
N USB Port
Connect a USB flash drive to this port to save the
scanned data or to print the data saved on a USB flash
drive.

• Use USB flash drives compatible with Mass

Storage Class and USB 2.0 or 3.0
specifications. P ADF Original Unit Lever
Pull this lever up to open the ADF original unit cover
O Operation Panel when documents are jammed.
Use to perform operations or settings. Q Auto Document Feeder (ADF)
You can adjust the angle so that it is easier to see. Up to about 200 documents can be automatically fed.
R ADF Original Guide
Slide to fit the width of the document.
S ADF Original Output Tray
Documents that are read from the ADF are output here.
T Front Cover
Normally the front cover is locked and cannot be opened.
This lock is automatically released when a paper jam or
other problems occur.
To open the front cover in other cases, go to
[Maintenance] from the [Home1] screen and touch [Front
Cover Release].
U Feed Tray 1, Feed Tray 2, Feed Tray 3 (Feed
Trays)
Load the paper to be used for printing here.

• Use the standard tray for thick paper and other

special paper types.

V Paper Alignment Lever

Use this lever to align the documents that are output. If
the lever interferes with output, pull it up and lock it.

13

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Operation Panel
Various operations and settings can be performed using the operation panel.
The color and condition (light up or flashing) of the lamps indicate the machine status or errors such as paper
jams.

A Touch Panel J Stop Key

Use to perform operations or settings. This panel also Press this key to stop the job that is in progress.
displays information such as error messages and K Interrupt Key
confirmation messages. Press this key to pause the job that is in progress in order
Depending on the screen or list, flick operations may be to execute a different job.
available by flicking your finger in a certain direction on L Reset Key
the touch panel. (p. 15 "Touch Panel") Press this key to return the settings to their default
B Home Key values.
Press this key to bring up the [Home1] screen.
C Login / Logout Key • Only the settings for the selected mode are
reset. The settings for other modes remain
Press this key to log in or log out.
unchanged by this operation.
D Function Keys
You can preset frequently used functions and settings. M Clear Key
Use these keys as shortcut keys.
Press this key to clear letters or numbers that have been
• For specific instructions on how to register entered.
functions and settings, contact your N Numeric Keys
administrator. Use these keys to enter numbers.
O Power Key
E Data Lamp
When you press this key while the main power is on, the
This lamp lights up when there is a job waiting and
operation power turns on and this key lights up. Holding it
flashes when this machine is receiving data.
turns off the operation power, and the machine goes into
F Error Lamp stand-by mode.
This lamp flashes when an error occurs.
P Wake Up Key
G Main Power Lamp This key lights up when this machine is in power saving
This lamp lights up when the main power is on. mode. Pressing this key when it is lit makes the machine
H Job Status Key ready for operation.
Press this key to check jobs that are in progress or
finished. • Pressing this key when it is not lit makes the
I Start Key machine go into sleep mode.
Press this key to start an operation.

14

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Touch Panel

G FORCEJET Link Icon

[Home1] Screen This icon indicates whether all parts required for printing
are working correctly. The display will differ depending on
the consumable or configured details.
• You are using RISO ink.
• You are using non-RISO ink.
When lit: Ink information is entered.
When flashing: Ink information is not entered.

For more information on setting ink information, see the

"Troubleshooting Guide".
H Remaining Amount of Ink
These icons indicate the amount of remaining ink for
each color. The indicator starts flashing when the time to
replace an ink cartridge comes close. Prepare a new ink
cartridge for the color that flashes.
The [Home1] screen appears when you press the [Home]
key in the operation panel. • If you are not using RISO ink, the remaining
To access the settings and operations, touch the button amount of ink is not displayed.
for the mode that you want to use.
I [Fiery] Button
• The screen displayed varies depending on your This button is displayed when using the optional print
model, the optional equipment connected, and
controller ComColorExpress FS2000C. Touch this button
settings.
to show the Fiery mode screen. For more information,
see the user's guide for the print controller.
A Mode Buttons
Touch these buttons to bring up the corresponding mode J Button
screen. Touch this button to move to the [Home2] screen.
A lock icon in the upper right corner of a button indicates K Date/time
that you must log in to access that mode. The current date and time is displayed.
B User Name
The name of the user currently logged in is displayed.
C [Admin Menu] Button
Touch this button to access the administrator settings.

• This button does not appear when the user is

not logged in as an administrator.

D [Maintenance] Button
Touch this button to access maintenance features.
E [System Info] Button
Touch this button to display consumables, machine, and
user information.
F Offline
This icon is displayed when [Online/Offline] is set to
[OFF].

15

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 [Home2] Screen Favorite Shortcuts
You can register up to nine shortcuts to your
Displayed by touching [ ] or flicking the screen to personal [Favorites] registered for each mode.
the left on the [Home1] screen.

■ Registering a favorite shortcut

A [Shortcut]
You can register up to nine shortcuts to the favorites of
1 Display the [Home2] screen.
each mode on the [Home2] screen.
B Button
2 Touch [Add].
The [Add Favorite Shortcut] screen is displayed.
Touch this button to display the [Home1] screen.

• You can also flick to the right on the [Home2] 3 Select the mode.
screen to display the [Home1] screen.

C [Perfect Binding] Button

4 Select one of the favorites.
This button is displayed when using the optional Perfect
Binder. Printed body pages and a cover can be set to 5 Touch [OK].
bind an entire book. • The button color and type of icon for favorite
For more information, see the user's guide for the Perfect shortcuts registered to the [Home2] screen will
Binder. differ depending on the mode the favorite is
applicable to.

16

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Touch Panel

■ Deleting a favorite shortcut

1 Display the [Home2] screen.

2 Touch [Delete].
3 Select
delete.
the shortcut you wish to

A check will be placed on the selected shortcut.

4 Touch [Delete].
The [Confirm] screen is displayed. A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in Copy mode.

5 Touch [OK]. B Setting Buttons

Use these buttons to set up copy functions.
Touch [More Menu] to display other setting buttons.
C Original Image and Finishing Image
Mode Screens The setting details can be confirmed with the icons that
are displayed.
Pressing a mode button on the [Home1] screen will The image of the original is shown on the left while the
bring up the corresponding mode screen. image of the finishing is shown on the right.
D [Copies]
Enter or check the number of copies here.
[Copy] Screen E Page Switching Buttons
Use these buttons to switch the setting button pages.
If you are using an optional scanner, you can You can also switch pages by dragging the area of the
operate or check copy jobs on this screen. setting buttons to the left or right.

17

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 ■ PC
[Scan] Screen
You can send the scanned data to a computer on the
If you are using an optional scanner, you can network.
operate or check scan jobs on this screen.
There are three ways to transmit scan data.

■ Mail
You can send the scanned data by e-mail.

A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in Scan mode.
B Setting Buttons
Use these buttons to enter [Destination] and [Document
Name] as well as to set up scanner functions.
Touch [More Menu] to display other setting buttons.
A Function Buttons C Finishing Image
Select a function that can be used in Scan mode. The setting details can be confirmed with the icons that
B Setting Buttons are displayed.
Use these buttons to enter [Address], [Document Name],
and [Sender] as well as to set up scanner functions.
Touch [More Menu] to display other setting buttons.
C Finishing Image
The setting details can be confirmed with the icons that
are displayed.

18

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Touch Panel

■ Console
[Print] Screen
You can save the scanned data to the internal hard disk
of this machine. The saved data can be downloaded from On this screen, you can operate and check print
the RISO console. jobs that are sent from a computer.

■ Waiting Job List Screen

Thumbnail Display

A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in Scan mode.
B Setting Buttons
Use these buttons to enter [Document Name] as well as
to set up scanner functions. List display
Touch [More Menu] to display other setting buttons.
C Finishing Image
The setting details can be confirmed with the icons that
are displayed.

A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in Print mode.
B View
Waiting jobs are listed in this view.
C Sub Menu
You can check the details and edit or delete the settings
for the selected job.
D / / / Buttons
Use these buttons to scroll through the list.
E [Selected]
The number of selected jobs is displayed.

19

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 ■ Change Setting Screen
[Storage] Screen
This screen appears when you select [Change Setting] in
the sub menu on the [Waiting Job List] screen. You can operate and check stored jobs on this
screen.
The Storage mode has two functions: [Save], which
allows you to save data to a folder, and [Load],
which enables printing of documents saved in a
folder.

■ View Screen in [Storage] - [Save]

Icon display

A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in the change setting
screen.
B Setting Buttons
Use these buttons to set up print functions.
C [Copies]
Enter or check the number of copies here.
D Finishing Image
The setting details can be confirmed with the icons that
are displayed. List display

E Document Name
The name of the selected document is displayed here.

A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in Storage mode.
B Folders Display
Folders that can be used are displayed in a list in this
view.
C Sub Menu
Click this button to change the color or name of the
selected folder.
D / / / Buttons
Use these buttons to scroll through the list.

20

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Touch Panel

E Sub Menu F [Destination Folder]

The following settings are available for selected The name of the destination folder selected on the list
documents: screen is displayed here.
• Details
• Rename • If the available space on the internal hard disk is
• Delete low, delete unnecessary documents in the
folder to increase available space.
F Documents List
The documents saved in the selected folder are
displayed in a list. ■ View Screen in [Storage] - [Load]
• In the list display, you can touch one of the titles Icon display
to sort the items on the list. The list can be
sorted in the ascending or descending order
based on the folder name, configuration of a
PIN code, document name, or date and time of
save.

■ Save Document Screen in [Storage] -

[Save]
This screen appears when you touch [Save Document]
on the list screen.

List display

A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in Storage mode.
B Setting Buttons
Use these buttons to set up storage (save) functions. A Function Buttons
C Finishing Image Select a function that can be used in Storage mode.
The setting details can be confirmed with the icons that B Folders Display
are displayed. Folders that can be used are displayed in a list in this
D [HDD Usage] Indicator view.
The internal hard disk space currently used is indicated C Sub Menu
as a percentage. Click this button to change the color or name of the
E [Document Name] Button selected folder.
Press this button to open the [Document Name Setting] D / / / Buttons
screen. Use this button to name a document. Use these buttons to scroll through the list.

21

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 E [Copies]
Enter or check the number of copies to print. [USB] Screen
F [Selected]
You can operate and check USB jobs on this
The number of selected documents is displayed here.
screen.
G Sub Menu
The USB mode has two functions: [Save], which
The following settings are available for selected
allows you to save the scanned data to a USB flash
documents:
drive, and [Load], which enables printing of
• Details documents (PRN files) saved to a USB flash drive
• Change Setting from the printer driver.
• Rename
• Delete
• Copy to USB Drive ■ View Screen in [USB] - [Save]
• Copy to Folder Icon display
H Documents Display
The documents saved in the selected folder are
displayed in a list.

• In the list display, you can touch one of the titles

to sort the items on the list. The list can be
sorted in the ascending or descending order
based on the folder name, configuration of a
PIN code, document name, or date and time of
save.

List display

A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in USB mode.
B Folders Display
Folders that can be used are displayed in a list in this
view.
C / / / Buttons
Use these buttons to scroll through the list.
D Folder Path Display
Displays the full path for the location of the selected
folder within the USB flash drive.

22

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Touch Panel

• In the list display, you can touch one of the titles

■ View Screen in [USB] - [Load]
to sort the items on the list. The list can be Icon display
sorted in the ascending or descending order
based on the folder name.

■ Save Document Screen in [USB] -

[Save]

List display

A Function Buttons
Select a function that can be used in USB mode.
B Setting Buttons
Use these buttons to set up USB Save functions.
Touch [More Menu] to display other setting buttons.
C Finishing Image
The setting details can be confirmed with the icons that
are displayed.
D [Memory Usage] Indicator A Function Buttons
The space on the USB flash drive currently being used is Select a function that can be used in USB mode.
indicated as a percentage. B View
E [Document Name] Button The folders and documents saved on a USB flash drive
Press this button to open the [Document Name Setting] are displayed in a list.
screen. Use this button to name a document. C Sub Menu
F [Destination Folder] The following settings are available for selected
The name of the destination folder selected on the list documents:
screen is displayed here. • Details
• Change Setting
• Copy to Folder

D / / / Buttons
Use these buttons to scroll through the list.
E Folder Path Display
Displays the full path for the location of the selected
folder within the USB flash drive.

23

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 • In the list display, you can touch one of the titles
[External System Link] Screen
to sort the items on the list. The list can be
sorted in the ascending or descending order
When using an external system link, you can
based on the folder name or number of
operate documents saved on an external system.
documents.
The screen displayed on this machine vary
according to the external system you use. The
■ Change Setting Screen in [USB] - following explanation is an example when you link
with the external system using the MPS software.
[Load]
This screen appears when you touch [Change Setting] in
the sub menu on the document list screen. ■ Documents screen

• When using the optional PS kit, select a PDF

file and touch [Print Setting].

A Documents Display
The documents that can be used are displayed.

• You can touch one of the titles to sort the items

A Function Buttons on the list. The list can be sorted in the
Select a function that can be used in USB mode. ascending or descending order based on the
B Setting Buttons document name, name of the owner, number of
Use these buttons to set up USB Load functions. pages, or date and time of save.
When you select a PDF file, touching the [More Menu]
button will bring up other setting buttons. B [Select All] Button
C [Copies] Touch this to select all documents displayed in the list of
Enter or check the number of copies to print. documents.

D Finishing Image C / Buttons

The setting details can be confirmed with the icons that Use these buttons to scroll through the list.
are displayed. D Sub Menu
E [Selected Documents] Deletes the selected documents or displays the detailed
The name of the selected document is displayed here. information and the total amount of the selected
documents.
E [Close] Button
Closes the screen and disconnects the connection with
external systems.
F [Selected]
The number of selected documents is displayed here.

24

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Touch Panel

• Depending on the settings of the administrator,

[Maintenance] Screen
the [External System Link] button may be
hidden or displayed with a different name.
[Print Head Cleaning], [Front Cover Release] and
Contact your administrator for details.
other functions are available on this screen. For
more information, see "Maintenance" (p. 9-2) in the
"Appendix".
[Admin Menu] Screen
This screen is only displayed when you are logged
in as an administrator. You can access the settings
that an administrator can use and modify. For more
information, see the "Administrator's Guide".

[System Info] Screen

■ Consumables Screen
This screen displays the status of consumables, such as
paper and ink.
You can also change the tray settings.
A Category Selection Buttons
The categories of administrator menu setting buttons are
displayed here.
Touch [All] to show all setting buttons in the administrator
menu.
B Setting Buttons
Use these buttons to set up the administrator menu
functions.
C / Buttons
Use these buttons to scroll through the list.

25

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 ■ Machine Info Screen ■ User Info Screen
This screen displays information about this machine. This screen displays the user name and groups of the
user logged in.

A Machine Info List

B / Buttons A Information Buttons
Use these buttons to scroll through the list. You can display the usage status of the user.
C [Counter] Button
Touch [Change Password] to change the password.
The detailed count for each paper size is displayed.
D [Information Print] Button If a copy or print limit is set by an administrator, touch
Touch this button to print the system information or a [Count Limit Display] to view the usage status.
sample image.
E [Service Count] If you are using an IC card reader, touch [IC Card
Displays the service count. Regist.] to register the card information for users logged
in.
F [Status / Options] Button
Touch this button to display information on the connected
• If you are using an external system link, the
optional equipment and its status.
following buttons are also displayed:
- [View Balance]: You can check the balance of
each user who is logged in.
For more information on the billing system using
the [External System Link] function, contact
your dealer or authorized service
representative.

■ License Info Screen

This screen displays the license information of the
system used with this product.

26

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Touch Panel

Touch Panel Selecting a Button

To select a button on the touch panel, touch the
You can operate the machine by using the touch
button with your finger.
panel and keys on the operation panel.
Either a part of or the entire selected button will turn blue.
You can touch buttons displayed on the screen to
select items, switch between screens by flicking
your finger on the touch panel, or scroll through
lists by swiping your finger.

Switching Screens
You can switch between the [Home1] screen and
[Home2] screen by flicking the screen to the left or
right. For more information, see "[Home1] Screen"
(p. 15) and "[Home2] Screen" (p. 16).
Selected button Buttons not selected

Scrolling
You can scroll through the screen on which setting
items are displayed or through lists of folders and
documents by flicking the screen to the left/right or
top/bottom. Touch the screen to stop the scrolling.
You can also scroll through scrollable screens and
lists with the drag operation by sliding your finger to
the left/right or top/bottom without lifting your finger
from the touch panel. Remove your finger from the
Selected Not selected
touch panel to stop the scrolling.

Selected Not selected

27

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Buttons that are not available under the current
conditions are grayed out. You can use these Entering Text
buttons when the required conditions are met.
When entering user names or passwords, enter the
required information on the text input screen.

1 Touch the characters you want to

enter one by one.
To move the cursor, touch [ ] or [ ]. Touch [ ]
if you need to erase a character to the left of the
cursor.

• If the available characters are restricted, as

is the case with passwords, the characters
This option is available This option is not that cannot be used are grayed out.
because [Front Cover] available because [Back
is set to [ON]. Cover] is set to [OFF]. • To enter an upper case letter, touch [Shift]
first, and enter the character. To return to
the lower case letter input, touch [Shift]
again.
Confirming / Canceling a
• The maximum number of characters that
Setting can be entered and the current number of
characters entered are displayed to the
When [OK] is displayed on a screen, you must
right of the text input field.
touch [OK] to save the settings. If you do not touch
[OK], the settings may be canceled.
To cancel the settings you have edited, touch
[Cancel].

2 After entering the text, touch [OK].

• Depending on the entry area, touching the area
may not open up an entry screen. In such
cases, use the numeric keys.

• The current selected area is indicated by a

flashing short line under numbers or letters. To
switch the area, touch the area that you want to
Colors of Setting Buttons enter text in.

When a setting is changed, the setting button turns

color to indicate that the setting has been changed
from the default value.

28

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Preparation

This chapter explains how to turn on the power, log

in, load the paper, and do other preparations to Turning Off the Power
make this machine ready for use.

• When using the feed tray, you do not need to 1 Press and hold the [Power] key on
the operation panel.
set the standard tray.

2 Check
• With the RISO console, you can check the
that the [Power] key is off,
status of the machine on your computer. (p. 6-1
"RISO Console") then turn off the main power switch.
The [Main Power] lamp turns off.

• To turn on the main power again, first make

Power sure that the [Main Power] lamp is off.

• Remove the power plug only after turning off

The machine has two power switches, the main
the main power switch.
power switch and the [Power] key. Use the main
power switch to turn on the main power to the
whole machine.
Press the [Power] key to start this machine. Power-saving Features
• To turn off the power to this machine in normal If you leave the machine unattended for some time,
use, press and hold the [Power] key on the it automatically goes to power saving mode
operation panel. according to the administrator settings.
The power saving mode has two states, the
• Do not turn off the main power except when the
backlight off state and the sleep state. The
machine is not going to be used for an extended
period of time or when the power supply is respective transition times and power consumption
unintentionally stopped due to lightning strike or in sleep are set by the administrator.
other unexpected causes. When the power saving mode turns on, the touch
panel turns off, and the [Wake Up] key turns on.
When you press the [Wake Up] key, the power
saving mode is canceled, and the machine returns
Turning On the Power to normal operating mode.
The machine takes longer to recover from the sleep

1 Make sure that the power plug is

inserted into an electrical outlet.
state than from the backlight off state.

2 Turn on the main power switch.

The [Main Power] lamp on the operation panel turns
on.

3 Press the [Power] key on the

operation panel.
The power turns on and the [Power] key lights up.

29

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Login 3 Input your password and touch
[Login].
Follow the displayed instructions for operation.
Lock icons in the upper right corner of mode
buttons indicate that you must log in to access
• When logging in for the first time, change
those modes. the temporary password to your own
password.
Lock icon
When you are successfully logged in, the screen you
were in when you pressed the [Login/Logout] key
appears again. Your user name is displayed at the
bottom left of the screen.

• After finishing operations, be sure to press the

[Login/Logout] key to log out.

• Contact your administrator if you cannot find

your name, or if you have forgotten the
password.

• When logging in for the first time, you need the • If your user name does not appear at the
temporary password that is issued by the bottom left of the [Home1] screen, touch the
administrator. mode button and perform the operations
described in steps 2 and 3 under "Logging In".
When you are successfully logged in, the
screen for the selected mode appears.
Logging In

• When using an IC card reader, you can log in by Changing the Login Password
holding the IC card over the card reader.

1 Press the [Login/Logout] key. 1 Touch [System Info] on the [Home1]

screen after logging in.

2 On the [Login] screen, select your

name. 2 Touch [User Info] - [Change
Password].
To find your name, scroll through the screen or
press the index button to display user names.
The [Password] screen appears after you select 3 Enter the new password and touch
[Next].
your name.

4 On the [Change Password (confirm)]

screen, enter the new password
again and touch [OK].

30

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Preparation

Loading the Paper 3 Move the stopper to make space.

Move the stopper by holding both sides.

Load the paper in the feed trays and the standard

tray.

• We recommend loading the feed trays with

types of paper you will use most often.

• Use the standard tray for the following types of

paper:
- Thick paper and other special paper
- Preprinted paper
- Postcards
4 Load the paper.
When using paper with different characteristics on
- Envelopes the front and back sides, load the printing side face
For more information, see "Printing Paper" in down. Do not load too many sheets.
the "Safety Information". When loading the paper, be careful not to let its edge
contact the paper guides to prevent it from being
bent.

Loading the Paper in the Feed

Trays

1 Pull a tray out, toward the front.

5 Move the paper feed guide and

stopper against the edge of the
paper.

2 Hold the lever of the paper feed

guide, and pull it forward to spread
the paper feed guide until it stops.

31

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 • The machine detects the size of the paper
based on the stopper position. Be sure to
2 Spread the guides.
Raise the paper feed guide levers (both sides) to
move the guides against the edge of the unlock and slide the guides.
paper.

• To set A3 paper or B4 paper, install the A3/

B4 paper guide properly for each type. Pinch
both sides of the A3/B4 paper guide, slide it
out and then slide it into the appropriate hole
for the desired paper size.

B4 A3

3 Load the paper.

Load the paper with the printing side face up.

When using A3 paper

6 Push the tray back into the machine.

7 On the operation panel, check the
tray settings.
• When printing on envelopes, it is
When you have switched to a different type or size of
recommended that you connect the
paper, update the feed tray settings. (p. 1-8 "Paper
optional stacking tray and envelope feed
Selection")
kit.

• Be sure to load envelopes with their flaps

open and their bottom side entering the
Loading the Paper in the machine first.
Standard Tray

1 Open the standard tray until it stops. OK

Wrong

• The [Rotation] feature is useful for printing

on envelopes from a computer.

32

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Preparation

4 Adjust the paper guides so that they

are suitable for the paper size.
Adding or Switching the Paper
Move the guides against the edges of the paper, and
in the Standard Tray
push the lever to lock.
Press the standard tray descent button when
loading additional sheets or when switching paper.
Note that the standard tray is automatically lowered
when all paper is removed.

1 Press the standard tray descent

button to lower the standard tray.
Hold the button down until the tray reaches the
desired position.
• The machine detects the paper size at the
guide position. Be sure to move the guides
against the edge of the paper.

5 Adjust the paper feed pressure

adjustment lever.
For general use, set to " (NORMAL)". For
envelopes, drawing paper, postcards, and similar

2 Load
products, set to " (CARD)".
additional paper, or switch the
loaded paper.

6 On the operation panel, check the

tray settings.
When you have switched to a different type or size of
paper, update the feed tray settings. (p. 1-8 "Paper
Selection")

33

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Closing the Standard Tray

• Make sure that the power is on when you

perform this operation.

1 Remove the loaded paper.

The standard tray starts lowering.

2 Close the standard tray.

• Make sure the standard tray is all the way
down before closing it.

34

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Installing the Printer Driver

If you want to send data from a computer to print on

this machine, you must first install the printer driver Installing
onto the computer.

• Log in as a user with administrator privilege. 1 Load the included DVD-ROM in the
computer's DVD-ROM drive.
• Close all active applications.
The installation wizard automatically starts up. If the
• Use the uninstaller to uninstall the application. installation wizard does not start up, double-click the
For more information, see the "Administrator's "Install.exe" file on the DVD-ROM.
Guide".

• When using the optional PS kit, install and use a

dedicated printer driver included in the PS kit.
2 Select the desired language in the
pull-down menu and click [OK].
For more information, see "PS Kit" (p. 8-42) in
"Optional Equipment".
3 Click [Next].
Operating Environment 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
configure the settings.
The system requirements for activating the printer
driver are described in the table below.
Memory 1 GB or more
5 When the message for printing a
test page is displayed, click [Yes].
CPU Intel or fully compatible CPU

Hard disk
2 GB or more free space
(Space enough to operate the OS)
6 Confirm that the test page is printed
correctly and click [OK].
Display 1024 × 768 or greater resolution
• Pressing [Show "ReadMe" text.] will bring
up the ReadMe file. The ReadMe file
includes precautions for using the machine.

7 Click [Finish].
If the printer driver is installed over the existing one,
the computer restarts.

• If you do not want to restart the computer

now, remove the check mark from the
[Restart now] check box before clicking
[Finish].

8 Remove the DVD-ROM from the

computer.

• Keep the DVD-ROM in a safe place for

future reference.

35

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 About Jobs

This section describes how to use [Details], [Print],

[Delete], and other functions available from the Job List
Document List of each screen. Press the [Job
Status] key to view jobs. The job list displays the job name, status, owner
name, number of copies ( ), and receiving time
• A job is the unit of tasks performed by this ( ) for jobs that are being printed, in processing,
machine in each mode (e.g. Print mode, Copy and waiting to be printed.
mode). An icon indicating the job type is displayed on the
• In the following cases, the job name is displayed left side of the job name.
as "*****":
Icon Job Type
- Jobs with the [Hide Job Name] check box
Copy job
selected on the printer driver (p. 3-28 "PIN
Code") Print job
- Jobs that belong to users other than the user Storage (Load) job
currently logged in when [Job Name Display]
USB (Load) job
is set to [OFF] on the administrator menu
PS job (when using the optional PS kit)
Job with a PIN code

[Active / Idle] Screen Broken job

Touching [Active/Idle] displays a list of jobs in • / can be touched to scroll through the
list.
progress and jobs waiting to be printed. Jobs are
printed in order from the top of the list. • Touch [Select All] to select all jobs in the list.

Checking the Current Status of

a Job
The current status of the job being printed and
processed is displayed with a progress bar. The
expected finish time is also displayed for the jobs
currently printed.

• If the Mixed Size Original function is used or

/ when the number of pages of the print job is
unknown, the expected finish time will not be
• Output order (order of job priority) under [Active/ displayed.
Idle]
When interrupt copy is performed on the
machine, the interrupt copy job has priority over
jobs sent from the printer driver.

36

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 About Jobs

• Touch the sub menu to check the details of a

Canceling a Job
job, print the job again, or delete the job.
To cancel a job, select the job that you want to • / can be touched to scroll through the
cancel and either touch [Cancel] or press the [Stop] list.
key. To cancel a job with a PIN code, you need to
• Touch categories such as [Document/Job
enter the PIN code.
Name] or [Owner] to switch the sorting order
between ascending and descending for display.

• Touch [Select All] to select all jobs in the list.

Checking the Details of a Job
• Touch the button of the icon below the list to
Touch [Details] to view the details of a job in display only the selected types of jobs.
progress or waiting to be printed. All jobs will be displayed when no buttons are
selected.

• This list also displays a history of processed

[Finished] Screen jobs. The save period and number of jobs
displayed in the list are specified by the
administrator. Contact your administrator for
Touch [Finished] to display a list of completed jobs. details.

/ Sub menu

You can check the document/job name, owner

name, number of printed copies ( ), print date/
time ( ), and processing result.
An icon indicating the job type is displayed on the
left side of the job name.
Icon Job Type
Copy job
Print job
Scan (Mail) job
Scan (PC) job
Scan (Console) job
Storage (Save/Load) job
USB (Save/Load) job
PS job
(when using the optional PS kit)
Job with a PIN code
Broken job

37

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

38

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copying

Use the scanner to scan and make a copy of a paper original.

You can make copies in various ways by such as printing on both sides or fitting multiple pages
onto a single sheet to suit your different needs.

Overview of Copy Operations...............................p. 1-2

1. Load the original.

2. Touch [Copy] on the [Home1] screen.

3. Change the settings.

4. Specify the number of copies using the numeric keys.

5. Press the [Start] key.

Copy Settings.........................................................p. 1-7

This section explains each copy setting in detail.

Copy Mode Function Buttons.............................p. 1-31

This section explains the functions available in the copy mode.

1
ComColor GD Series User's Guide
 1 Copying
Copying

Overview of Copy Operations

This section explains the basic copy operations. ■ On the Platen Glass

1 Open the original cover.

Procedure
2 Load the original.
● 1 Load the original. Load the original face down on the glass. Align
the corner of the original with the upper-left
For more information on the types of originals that corner of the glass.
can be used, see "Originals" in the "Safety
Information".

■ In the ADF

1 Load the original in the ADF.

Align the originals and place them face up.

3 Close the original cover.

• Open and close the original cover gently.

● 2 Touch [Copy] on the [Home1]

2 Slide the original guides to match screen.
the width of the originals.

1-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Copy Operations

● 3 Change the settings.

Loading the Next Copy Job
Specify the detailed settings for copying.
For more information on the functions that can be During copying, once scanning of the original has
configured, see "List of Settings" (p. 1-5). been completed, you can begin scanning the next
original.

● 4 Specify the number of copies

using the numeric keys. 1 Press [Close] on the [Copying]
screen. 1
Enter the desired number of copies, up to a
maximum of 9,999.
2 Load the next original and press the
[Start] key.
● 5 Press the [Start] key. A message appears, and the original is copied as
The [Copying] screen is displayed, and copying of the next job.
the original starts. The current status is displayed
on the screen.
• Touch [Slow Printing] to slow down the printing speed. Canceling Copying
This also reduces the amount of noise produced by

1 Press the [Stop] key.

the machine when printing jobs.
• If another job is being printed, a message is displayed
The [Suspending] screen is displayed.
and the copying starts after finishing the ongoing job.

• When you need to copy a document while a job

is being printed, press the [Interrupt] key to
pause the current job, and start another copy
job.

■ When using the platen glass to scan

an original with several pages
After scanning one page of an original, a screen with a
message asking whether there is another page to be
scanned appears.
When there is another page to be scanned, load the next
2 Touch [Cancel].
The [Confirm] screen is displayed.
page and touch [Scan]. After all pages of the original are
scanned, touch [Scanned].
3 Touch [OK].
Copying is canceled.

4 Touch [Close].

1-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Changing Settings during 2 Touch [Maintenance].

The [Maintenance] screen is displayed.
Copying

1 Press the [Stop] key.

The [Suspending] screen is displayed.

2 Touch [Change Setting].

The [Change Setting] screen is displayed.

3 Make the necessary adjustments.

The following maintenance options are available:
• Print Head Cleaning
• Front Cover Release
• Online/Offline
• Paper Guide Control

3 Change Settings.
You can change the following settings:
• Touch [Online/Offline] to display the
[Online/Offline] screen. You can
monopolize the printer by setting [Online/
• Slow Printing (p. 1-29 "Slow Printing") Offline] to [OFF].
• Print Density (p. 1-12 "Print Density")
• For more information on [Print Head
• Paper Selection (p. 1-8 "Paper Selection") Cleaning] and [Front Cover Release], see
• Image Position (p. 1-22 "Image Position") "Maintenance" (p. 9-2) in the "Appendix".

• If you touch [Proof], only one copy of the

• If you touch [Proof], only one copy of the
page that was being processed when the
page that was being processed when the
[Stop] key is pressed is output.
[Stop] key is pressed is output.
• If you are using the optional auto-control
stacking tray or high capacity stacker, you
4 Touch [Close]. can adjust the position of the stacking tray
with [Paper Guide Control].

5 Touch [Continue].
The copy job is resumed with the changed settings
For more information, see "Maintenance"
(p. 9-2) in the "Appendix".
applied.

4 Touch [Close].
Performing Maintenance
During Copying 5 Touch [Continue].
The copy job is resumed with the adjustment
applied.

1 Press the [Stop] key.

The [Suspending] screen is displayed.

1-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Copy Operations

List of Settings
The following is a list of settings available in Copy mode.

• There are items that are displayed only when you are using the optional face down finisher, stacking tray, or
multifunction finisher. In such case, the display and functions may differ depending on the optional equipment
that is connected.

1
Setting item Use this item to: See
Color Mode Select color or monochrome printing. p. 1-7
Reproduction Size Reduce or enlarge the copied image. p. 1-7
Paper Selection Change the paper tray, paper type, and feed control settings according to p. 1-8
the copying paper.
Scanning Size Specify the scanning size for originals. p. 1-10
Original Orientation Specify the orientation of the original. p. 1-10
Duplex / Simplex Specify the sides of the original to be scanned and the sides of the paper to p. 1-11
be printed on.
Sort Specify the printing method for making multiple copies of the original. p. 1-11
Scanning Level Adjust the scanning level of originals. p. 1-12
Print Density Specify the print density. p. 1-12
ADF Scan & Pause Copy the original as one job even when having to load the original in p. 1-12
multiple sets due to the large number of pages in the original.
Mixed Size Original Copy the original containing pages of the different orginal sizes. p. 1-13
Book Shadow Remove shadows that appear in the center of images when an open book p. 1-13
Erasure is scanned.
Page Split Scan double-spread pages and split them into two parts (right and left). p. 1-14
Combine Impose continuous pages onto one sheet. p. 1-15
Image Repeat Impose multiple copies of the same original onto one sheet. p. 1-16
Booklet Specify the imposition setting when creating a booklet. You can also bi-fold p. 1-16
the pages and bind them in the center when the optional multifunction
finisher is connected.
Stamp Stamp the page number, date, or text in the header or footer. p. 1-17
Page Border Add a border line in the margins of the paper. p. 1-19
Image Quality Specify the resolution for scanning originals. p. 1-20
Original Type Select the original type so that the appropriate image processing is p. 1-20
performed before printing the scanned data.
Gamma Correction Adjust the color balance (CMYK) of the scanned data. p. 1-21
Image Control Specify the image processing of the original. p. 1-21
Base Color Level Make the background color (base color) lighter so that the text is easier to p. 1-22
read.
Image Position Adjust the print position. p. 1-22
Overlay Make copies upon layering an image that has been saved on the storage. p. 1-23

1-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Setting item Use this item to: See

Program Specify the number of copies by group (such as corporate division or p. 1-24
class). You can quickly print exactly the number of copies of the number of
sets you need.
Add Cover Add front and back covers to the printout. p. 1-27
Separation Insert slip sheets. When the optional face down finisher, high capacity p. 1-27
stacker, or multifunction finisher is connected, the offset output setting is
also available.
Binding Margin Specify the binding margin. p. 1-28
Staple/Punch Specify the staple settings. p. 8-7
(When using the optional face down finisher)
Specify the staple and punch settings. p. 8-37
(When using the optional multifunction finisher)
Fold Specify the fold of the printing paper. p. 8-39
(When using the optional multifunction finisher with the folder unit)
Slow Printing Decrease the printing speed. This also reduces the amount of noise p. 1-29
produced by the machine when printing jobs.
Output Tray Select the output tray for printouts.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray / wide stacking tray p. 8-16
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41
Face Up/Down Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face down in the stacker.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray / wide stacking tray p. 8-16
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41
Output Tray Relay Switch the output tray automatically when the output tray becomes full.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray p. 8-17
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41
Paper Tray Relay Feed paper automatically from a different tray with the same paper size and p. 1-30
paper type when the selected tray runs out of paper.
Auto Image Rotation Rotate the image 90 degrees automatically when the orientation of the p. 1-30
original and paper do not match.
Interrupt Copy Pause the job being printed to copy another document. p. 1-30
Favorites Call frequently used settings. p. 1-31
Additional Copy Make additional copies of the original that was just copied without re- p. 1-31
scanning.
Sample Copy Make one copy and stop copying to check the printing result before making p. 1-32
a large number of copies.
Check Setting Check the current settings. p. 1-32
Custom Menu Register favorites and default settings, and edit the button order. p. 1-33

1-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Copy Settings

Reproduction Size
Copy at the specified reproduction size. 1
[100% (1:1)]
Select this option to copy at 100%.
[Auto]
The reproduction size is set automatically based on the
original size and paper size. (p. 1-8 "Paper Selection")
[Reduce]
Setting buttons
Select this option to copy by reducing a standard size
original to fit another standard size paper.
[Enlarge]
Color Mode Select this option to copy by enlarging a standard size
original to fit another standard size paper.
Select color or monochrome printing. Manual
Specify the reproduction size to enlarge or reduce the
[Auto]
original when copying.
Select this option if you want the machine to
automatically detect the color of the original and copy in
color (cyan, magenta, yellow, gray, and black) or black
and white.
1 Touch [Reproduction Size].
The [Reproduction Size] screen is displayed.
[Full Color]

2 Specify the reproduction size.

Select this option to copy by converting the original data
to five-color data (using cyan, magenta, yellow, gray, and
black). To use a user-defined reproduction size, touch [ ]
or [ ] to specify the size. You can also enter the
[Black]
number using the numeric keys.
Select this option to copy in one color (black) regardless
of the color of the original.
[Cyan]
Select this option to copy in one color (cyan) regardless
3 Touch [OK].
of the color of the original.
[Magenta]
Select this option to copy in one color (magenta)
regardless of the color of the original.

1 Touch [Color Mode].

The [Color mode] screen is displayed.

2 Select the color mode.

3 Touch [OK].

1-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Paper Selection Changing the Paper Tray

Setting
Select a paper tray.
You can also change the tray settings (paper size, Touch [Paper Tray Setting] to change the paper
paper type, double-feed check, and auto selection). tray settings. When changing the paper loaded in a
tray, be sure to change the paper tray settings.
[Auto]
Select this option if you want the paper tray to be
automatically selected from the tray selection.
Paper tray selection
When using a paper size that is different from the original
size, or to use a tray with [Auto Selection] not set to [ON],
select a paper tray.
[Paper Tray Setting]
Change the paper tray settings.

1 Touch [Paper Selection].

The [Paper Selection] screen is displayed.
Paper tray selection
Select the paper tray for which you are going to change
the settings.
2 Select [Auto] or select a paper tray. [Paper Size]
Select the paper size.

3 Touch [OK]. [Paper Type]

Select the paper type and thickness.
• If you use the "Mixed Size Original" (p. 1-13) [Double-feed Check]
option, [Paper Selection] will be set to [Auto]. Select whether to check for the feeding of multiple sheets
of paper. Normally, this setting is set to [ON]. This
function uses light permeability to detect multiple sheets
of paper, so when using paper printed on the back or
paper with a dark base color or envelopes, select [OFF].
[Auto Selection]
Set this option to [ON] to make a paper tray available for
automatic selection.

1 Touch [Paper Tray Setting] on the

[Paper Selection] screen.
The [Paper Tray Setting] screen is displayed.

2 Select the paper tray for which you

are going to change the settings.

3 Touch [Paper Size].

The [Paper Size] screen is displayed.

4 Select a paper size and touch [OK].

1-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

5 Touch [Paper Type].

The [Paper Type] screen is displayed.
■ Paper Type
[Type], [Thickness]

6 Select a paper type and touch [OK].

7 Configure [Double-feed Check].
8 Configure [Auto Selection]. 1

9 Touch [OK].
• It is recommended that trays that are loaded
with special paper (high-quality paper, color
paper, thick paper, paper with letterhead, etc.)
should not be set to be available for auto
selection.

■ Paper Size
[Auto]
Select this option if you want standard size originals to be
detected automatically.
[Standard]
• If the thickness of the paper loaded in the
Specify the standard size. standard tray is set to [Envelope], duplex
[Custom] printing cannot be performed from the standard
Select this option to select from non-standard paper tray.
sizes registered by the administrator in advance.
• The machine selects the color profile according
[Manual] to the selected paper type. (When you change
Specify a non-standard paper size that is not registered. the paper type, the printing result changes.) If
the printing result is not what you expected,
change the paper type.

• When using special paper, you can add settings

to [U1] through [U5] for [Thickness]. For more
information, contact your dealer or authorized
service representative.

• When [ON] is not selected, the sheet width is

set to the width of each paper tray guide. The
maximum length of the relevant tray is used for
the length.

1-9

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Scanning Size Original Orientation

Specify the scanning size for originals. [Top Side Up]
Select this when loading the original with the top of the
[Auto]
original facing toward the back of the platen glass or the
Select this option if you want the scanning size of the ADF.
original to be automatically detected.
[Top Side Left]
[Standard]
Select this when loading the original with the top of the
Select this option when using a standard size different original facing toward the left of the platen glass or the
from that of the original. ADF (so that the text of the original is sideways).
[Custom]
Select this option to select from non-standard paper
sizes registered by the administrator in advance.
[Manual]
1 Touch [Original Orientation].
The [Original Orientation] screen is displayed.
Specify a non-standard paper size that is not registered.

2 Select the original orientation.

1 Touch [Scanning Size].
The [Scanning Size] screen is displayed.
3 Touch [OK].
2 Specify the scanning size for
originals.
To use a non-standard size that is not registered,
touch [ ] or [ ] on the [Manual] screen to enter
values. You can also enter the number using the
numeric keys.

3 Touch [OK].

1-10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

Duplex / Simplex Sort

Specify the combination of the sides of the original Specify the paper output method when making
to be scanned and the sides of the paper to be multiple copies.
printed on.
[Auto]
[Simplex Simplex] Select this option if you want the machine to sort the
One side of the original is scanned and printed on a copies in sets when you load the original in the ADF and
single side of paper. sort the copies by page when you load the original on the
1
[Simplex Duplex] platen glass.
One side of the original is scanned. The scanned data is [Collated]
then printed on both sides of paper. Select this option to make copies in sets.
[Duplex Duplex] [Uncollated]
Both sides of the original are scanned and copied to Select this option to copy by page.
separate sides of paper.
[Duplex Simplex]
The scanned data of the two sides are copied onto a 1 Touch [Sort].
The [Sort] screen is displayed.
single side of two separate sheets of paper.
[Paging Direction]
Specify whether pages are opened right/left or top/
bottom.
2 Select the sorting type.
[Original Orientation] (p. 1-10 "Original Orientation")
3 Touch [OK].
How to set the combination of scanning sides and
printing sides is explained below using an example
of copying data scanned from a single side of the
original to both sides of paper.

1 Touch [Duplex/Simplex].
The [Duplex/Simplex] screen is displayed.
• If the [Confirm] screen appears, set the original
orientation to [Top Side Up] or [Top Side Left].

2 Touch [Simplex Duplex].

3 Specify [Paging Direction].
4 Touch [OK].

1-11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Scanning Level ADF Scan & Pause

You can adjust the scanning level of originals. When copying a quantity of originals that cannot be
loaded at one time in the ADF, these can be copied
[-2], [-1], [±0], [+1], [+2]
as one job. Up to 1,000 one-sided originals or 500
two-sided originals can be copied as one job.

1 Touch [Scanning Level].

The [Scanning Level] screen is displayed. • The maximum number of sheets that can be
loaded at one time in the ADF is 200 sheets
(with a paperweight of 80 g/m2 (21-lb bond)).
2 Select the scanning level. • Scan all originals using the ADF, and do not use
the platen glass.

3 Touch [OK]. • [ADF Scan & Pause] and [Book Shadow

Erasure] cannot be used together. (p. 1-13
"Book Shadow Erasure")
• When copying text originals with a background
color or originals printed on colored paper with
text that is difficult to read when copied, specify [OFF], [ON]
[Base Color Level]. This will make it possible to
lighten the background color (base color).
(p. 1-22 "Base Color Level")
1 Touch [ADF Scan & Pause].
The [ADF Scan & Pause] screen is displayed.

Print Density 2 Touch [ON].

You can adjust the amount of ink to be used for
printing.
3 Touch [OK].
[-3], [-2], [-1], [±0], [+1], [+2], [+3]
4 Press the [Start] key.
The [Copying] screen is displayed, and copying of

1 Touch [Print Density].

the original starts. The current status is displayed on
the screen.
The [Print Density] screen is displayed.
When there are no sheets of the original in the ADF,
the original add confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Select the print density.

5 Load the subsequent pages of the
3 Touch [OK]. original into the ADF, and touch
[Scan].
The scanning of the original starts.
Repeat this step until all pages are scanned.

6 Touch [Scanned].
The printing of the scanned data starts.

1-12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

Mixed Size Original Book Shadow Erasure

Use this option when loading originals of two This function removes the shadows that appear in
different sizes in the ADF. the center (inner margin) when scanning a book or
Load the original with the sides of the same length other bound documents.
aligned (A4-LEF* and A3, B5-LEF and B4, or
Letter-LEF and Ledger). • When placing a book on the platen glass, place
* Long Edge Feed it top side up and aligned with the arrow at the
upper left of the glass surface. This function
1
cannot be used with the book placed vertically
or at an angle.
ADF original • You cannot use [Book Shadow Erasure] with
orientation [ADF Scan & Pause] or [Mixed Size Original] at
the same time. (p. 1-12 "ADF Scan & Pause",
p. 1-13 "Mixed Size Original")

• [Mixed Size Original] cannot be used in

combination with the [Scanning Size], [Book
Shadow Erasure], [Page Split], [Combine],
[Image Repeat], [Booklet], [Page Border], or
[Add Cover] options. (p. 1-10 "Scanning Size",
OK
p. 1-13 "Book Shadow Erasure", p. 1-14 "Page
Split", p. 1-15 "Combine", p. 1-16 "Image
Repeat", p. 1-16 "Booklet", p. 1-19 "Page
Border", p. 1-27 "Add Cover")

• You can use any combination of the original

size when scanning on the platen glass. Wrong
• Use the [Mixed Size Original] option when
scanning originals of different sizes on the
platen glass and collating the pages.

[OFF], [ON]
Wrong
1 Set [Paper Selection] to [Auto].
For more information, see "Paper Selection" (p. 1-8).

2 Touch [Mixed Size Original].

[OFF], [10mm] (3/8"), [20mm] (13/16"), [30mm]
(1 3/16"), [40mm] (1 9/16"), [50mm] (1 15/16")
The [Mixed Size Original] screen is displayed.
[Page Split] (p. 1-14 "Page Split")

3 Touch [ON]. 1 Touch [Book Shadow Erasure].

The [Book Shadow Erasure] screen is displayed.
4 Touch [OK].
2 Select the erasure width.

1-13

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

3 Set [Page Split].

For more information, see "Page Split" (p. 1-14).

4 Touch [OK].
Page Split
[OFF]
Use this option to scan double-spread pages and
split them into two parts (right and left).
The original sizes that can be page-split are as
follows.
A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Letter
[ON]

• When placing a book on the platen glass, place

it top side up and aligned with the arrow at the 1 2 4 3
upper left of the glass surface. This function
cannot be used with the book placed vertically
or at an angle.

• You cannot use [Page Split] and [Mixed Size

Original] at the same time. (p. 1-13 "Mixed Size 1 2 3 4
Original")

[Page Order] How to set up a page split is explained below using

[OFF]: The page split function is not available. an example of setting [Page Selection while
Scanning] to [ON].
[ ] (Left to Right): For books that are opened from

the left.

[ ] (Right to Left): For books that are opened from

1 Touch [Page Split].
The [Page Split] screen is displayed.

the right.

[Page Selection while Scanning] 2 Specify the page order.

[OFF]: Double-spread pages are split into two pages
(right and left). Left to right
[ON]: You can specify the scan range for double-spread
pages.

Right to left

1-14

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

3 Set [Page Selection while Scanning]

to [ON]. Combine
This function imposes continuous pages onto one
4 Touch [OK]. sheet.

5 Press the [Start] key.

The scan range setting screen is displayed.
• You cannot use the [Combine] function with
[Mixed Size Original], [Image Repeat], or
[Booklet] function. (p. 1-13 "Mixed Size
Original", p. 1-16 "Image Repeat", p. 1-16
1
6 Select one of the following: [Left
Only], [Both Sides], or [Right Only].
"Booklet")

[Pages/Sheet]
[OFF], 2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages
7 Touch [Scan].
The scanning of the original starts.
[Layout]
Specify the order of page imposition.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all pages are scanned. Example: Portrait document

Pages per
8 Touch [Scanned].
The printing of the scanned data starts.
sheet
Layout

2 pages

4 pages

8 pages

[Original Orientation] (p. 1-10 "Original Orientation")

1 Touch [Combine].
The [Combine] screen is displayed.
• If the [Confirm] screen appears, set the original
orientation to [Top Side Up] or [Top Side Left].

2 Specify
sheet.
the number of pages per

3 Select a layout.
4 Touch [OK].

1-15

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Image Repeat Booklet

Impose multiple copies of the same original onto This function is used for duplex printing of
one sheet. continuous pages imposed onto one sheet.

• You cannot use the [Image Repeat] function • You cannot use the [Booklet] function with the
with [Mixed Size Original], [Combine], or [Reproduction Size], [Mixed Size Original],
[Booklet] function. (p. 1-13 "Mixed Size [Combine], [Image Repeat], [Page Border], or
Original", p. 1-15 "Combine", p. 1-16 "Booklet") [Binding Margin] function. (p. 1-7 "Reproduction
Size", p. 1-13 "Mixed Size Original", p. 1-15
[OFF], [2 Pages], [4 Pages], [8 Pages] "Combine", p. 1-16 "Image Repeat", p. 1-19
[Original Orientation] (p. 1-10 "Original Orientation") "Page Border", p. 1-28 "Binding Margin")

1 Touch [Image Repeat].

The [Image Repeat] screen is displayed.
Types of paper that can be used to create
booklets
A3, B4, A4, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Foolscap, Non-
• If the [Confirm] screen appears, set the original
standard size
orientation to [Top Side Up] or [Top Side Left].

2 Select
sheet.
the number of pages per 210 mm -
330 mm
(8 1/4" -
13") Paper feed

3 Touch [OK].
and output
direction
280 mm - 457 mm
(11" - 18")

[Layout Order]
Specify the layout order.
When this option is set to [OFF], the imposition function
is not available.

1 Touch [Booklet].
The [Booklet] screen is displayed.

2 Configure the layout order.

3 Touch [OK].
• When using the optional multifunction finisher,
you can configure [Binding], [Separating
Books], [Center Margin], and [Auto Reduction].
For more information, see "Binding ([Booklet])"
(p. 8-35) and "Separating Books ([Booklet])"
(p. 8-36) in "Optional Equipment".

1-16

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

Example: When the stamp start page is set to "2" and the
Stamp stamp start number is set to "3"

Stamp the page number, date, or text in the header

or footer.

• The page number and date cannot be stamped

on slip sheet paper or cover paper. (p. 1-27
"Separation", p. 1-27 "Add Cover")
1
• When using this function with [Combine] or
[Image Repeat], the page number and date are
stamped on each page of the copy paper, not [Apply Page]
per page of the original. When using this
Specify the pages on which to print the date stamp or text
function with [Booklet], the page number and
date are stamped on each booklet page. stamp.
[All Pages]: The text will be printed on all pages.
• Specifying the reproduction size does not affect
[First Page Only]: The stamp will be printed on the first
the size of the stamp that is printed.
page only.
• The [Stamp] and [Page Border] functions [Stamp Date]
cannot be used at the same time. (p. 1-19 Configure the date to use for the date stamp.
"Page Border") [Today]: Today's date (the date set on the machine) is
stamped.
[Page], [Date], [Text]
[Specify Date]: The specified date is stamped.
Select the type of stamp.
[Text to be printed]
[OFF]
Configure the text to use for the text stamp.
Stamps cannot be configured or printed.
[Print Position]
Specify the stamping position.
[Text Size]
Specify the size of the text for the stamp.
[Transparency]
[OFF]: Images are removed from the stamp area to
create a white space, and the stamp is printed in that
white space.
[ON]: The stamp is printed over an image when the
stamp area and an image overlap.
[Start Number]
Specify the first number for the page stamp.
[Stamp Start Page]
Specify on which page to start the page stamps.

1-17

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Configure the Page Stamp Configure the Date Stamp

1 Touch [Stamp].
The [Stamp] screen is displayed.
1 Touch [Stamp].
The [Stamp] screen is displayed.

2 Touch [Page]. 2 Touch [Date].

3 Configure the print position. 3 Configure the print position.
• You cannot print different types of stamps • You cannot print different types of stamps
in the same position. If the arrow for in the same position. If the arrow for
configuring the print position is grayed out configuring the print position is grayed out
and cannot be selected, select another and cannot be selected, select another
position. position.

4 Specify the text size.

Touch [ ] or [ ] to specify the size. You can also
4 Specify the text size.
Touch [ ] or [ ] to specify the size. You can also
touch the text box for [Text Size] and enter a size by touch the text box for [Text Size] and enter a size by
using the number pad. using the number pad.

5 Set the transparency option. 5 Set the transparency option.

6 Specify the start number. 6 Set the apply page option.
7 Specify the stamp start page. 7 Set the date to be stamped.
To specify a date of your choice, touch [Specify

8 Touch [OK]. Date] and touch the input screen displayed on the
screen to set the date.
You can also enter the number using the numeric
keys.

8 Touch [OK].

1-18

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

Configure the Text Stamp Page Border

1 Touch [Stamp].
The [Stamp] screen is displayed.
This option adds a border line in the margins of the
paper.

2 Touch [Text].
• Even when this option is used with [Combine] or
[Image Repeat], the border line is printed on
each copy paper, not per page of the original.
1
3 Configure the print position. • The border lines are printed over the original
data. If there is an overlap of an image in the
• You cannot print different types of stamps border printing area, part of the image may not
in the same position. If the arrow for be printed.
configuring the print position is grayed out
• When [Color Mode] is set to [Black], [Cyan], or
and cannot be selected, select another
[Magenta], colors that are not selectable are
position.
grayed out. (p. 1-7 "Color Mode")

4 Specify the text size.

• Printing a border on black-and-white copies can
make posters and signs stand out.
Touch [ ] or [ ] to specify the size. You can also
touch the text box for [Text Size] and enter a size by • You cannot use [Page Border] with [Mixed Size
using the number pad. Original], [Booklet], [Stamp], or [Add Cover] at
the same time. (p. 1-13 "Mixed Size Original",
p. 1-16 "Booklet", p. 1-17 "Stamp", p. 1-27 "Add
5 Set the transparency option. Cover")

6 Set the apply page option.

[OFF], [Red], [Blue], [Green], [Yellow], [Black]
Thickness of the border line (manual entry)

7 Configure the text to be printed. 1 Touch [Page Border].

The [Page Border] screen is displayed.
8 Touch [OK].
2 Select a border line color.
3 Touch [ ] or [ ] to specify the
thickness of the border line.
You can also enter the number using the numeric
keys.

4 Touch [OK].

1-19

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Image Quality Original Type

Specify the resolution for scanning originals. Select the original type so that the appropriate
image processing is performed before printing the
[Standard (300×300 dpi)]
scanned data.
Select this when the original has mostly text.
[Fine (300×600 dpi)] [Line/Photo]
Select this when the original has photos. The original is Select this when the original has both text and photos.
scanned with higher resolution. [Line]
Select this when the original has text or illustrations.

1 Touch [Image Quality].

The [Image Quality] screen is displayed.
[Photo]
Select this when the original has photos.
[Map/Pencil]
Select this for originals with a lot of subtle colors or fine
2 Select a resolution. lines, such as a map, or for originals with pencil drawings.
[Dot Process]

3 Touch [OK]. [Auto]: The dot process function is disabled.

[70 lpi]: Photos are reproduced with a printing resolution
• When [Color Mode] is set to [Black], [Image of 70 lpi.
Quality] is grayed out and cannot be selected. [100 lpi]: Photos are reproduced with a printing resolution
The resolution is set to [Standard of 100 lpi.
(600×600 dpi)].

1 Touch [Original Type].

The [Original Type] screen is displayed.

2 Select the original type.

3 IfPencil]
[Line/Photo], [Photo], or [Map/
is selected, set [Dot
Process].

4 Touch [OK].

1-20

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

Gamma Correction Image Control

This function adjusts the color balance (CMYK) of Specify the appropriate image processing settings
the scanned data. for the scanned data.

[Auto]
• When [Color Mode] is set to [Black], [Cyan], or
[Magenta], the gamma value can only be The values are automatically configured based on the
adjusted for black (K). (p. 1-7 "Color Mode") [Color Mode] and [Original Type] settings. (p. 1-7 "Color
Mode", p. 1-20 "Original Type")
1
[C] - [R] [Line/Photo Level]
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7] [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7]
The lower the value (lowest being [1]), the stronger the The higher the value (highest being [7]), the higher the
cyan (C) is in the image. The higher the value (highest text recognition level applied is (even text with unclear
being [7]), the stronger the red (R) is in the image. outlines is recognized as text).
[M] - [G] [Edge Enhancement]
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7] [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7]
The lower the value (lowest being [1]), the stronger the The higher the value (highest being [7]), the greater the
magenta (M) is in the image. The higher the value edge emphasis is for parts recognized as text.
(highest being [7]), the stronger the green (G) is in the [Moire Elimination]
image. [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7]
[Y] - [B] The higher the value (highest being [7]), the greater the
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7] reduction of moire is for parts recognized as a photo.
The lower the value (lowest being [1]), the stronger the

1 Touch [Image Control].

yellow (Y) is in the image. The higher the value (highest
being [7]), the stronger the blue (B) is in the image.
[K] The [Image Control] screen is displayed.
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7]
The higher the value (highest being [7]), the stronger the
black (K) is in the image.
2 Configure the details for image
processing.

1 Touch [Gamma Correction].

The [Gamma Correction] screen is displayed.
3 Touch [OK].
2 Select the balance for each color.
[Output Image] displays a preview of the image with
the adjusted color balance.

3 Touch [OK].

1-21

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Base Color Level Image Position

This function makes the background color (base Adjust the printing position of images.
color) lighter so that the text is easier to read when
[Front Side], [Back Side]
copying text originals with a background color or
originals printed on colored paper. Select which side to adjust the image position for.
[Reset]
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7] Select this option to return the adjusted value for the
The higher the value, the more the background color selected side (front or back side) to 0 mm.
level is reduced. [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ]
[Auto] Use these keys to move the position of images.
The density of the background color is set automatically.

1 Touch [Base Color Level]. 1 Touch [Image Position].

The [Image Position] screen is displayed.
The [Base Color Level] screen is displayed.

2 Configure the base color level 2 Inthethesidecase of duplex printing, select

to adjust the image position
settings. for ([Front Side] or [Back Side]).

3 Touch [OK]. 3 Touch [ ], [ ], [ ], and/or [ ] to

adjust the image position.

4 Touch [OK].
• You can adjust the printing position a maximum
of ±20 mm (13/16") up, down, left, or right, in
increments of 0.5 mm (1/64").

• When performing duplex printing, the front and

back sides can be adjusted separately.

1-22

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

Overlay 1 Touch [Overlay].

The [Overlay] screen is displayed.

Make copies upon layering an image that has been

saved on the storage. 2 Touch [ON].
• [Overlay] cannot be used together with the
following functions:
3 Touch [Image selection].
The [Overlay Image Selection] screen is displayed.
- "Reproduction Size" (p. 1-7) 1
- "Mixed Size Original" (p. 1-13)
- "Combine" (p. 1-15)
- "Image Repeat" (p. 1-16)
- "Booklet" (p. 1-16)
- "Program" (p. 1-24)
- "Add Cover" (p. 1-27)
- "Auto Image Rotation" (p. 1-30)

• If you are using the optional stacking tray or

multifunction finisher, set the output destination
to [Auto] or [Face Down Tray].
In order to change the folder, touch the text box for
[OFF], [ON] [Folder Name]. Select the folder in the [Select
[Folder Name] Folder] screen and touch [OK].
The name of the folder where the image specified with From the list of documents, select the file to use as
[Image Selection] is displayed here. the overlay image and touch [OK]. You will be
[Document Name] returned to the [Overlay] screen.
The name of the file for the image specified with [Image
Selection] is displayed here. • When a document is selected from the list,
a preview will be displayed in [Overlay
[Image Selection]
Image]. Touch [ ] / [ ] to switch
Specify the image to overlay.
between pages.
[Target Page(s)]
Configure which pages of the image file are to be • Touch [Details] to display the [Details]
screen and check the details of the
targeted.
document.
[Repetition]
Configure whether to repeatedly use the applicable page
of the image file.
[Priority Layer]
4 Configure the target pages.
When there are multiple pages in the file to use as
Configure whether to overlay the original or the overlay the overlay image, select which page will be
image on top. applicable.
Preview Area [All pages]: All pages will be used as the overlay
Use this are to check the applicable pages of the overlay image. The image will be layered over the original in
image, repetition of the image, and the settings for the order from the first page.
preferred layer. [First page]: The image on the first page only will be
used as the overlay image.

• It is not possible to specify a specific page

other than the first page.

1-23

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

5 Configure the repetition.

[ON]: The overlay image will be repeatedly layered
Program
over the original.
This option is convenient when the number of
[OFF]: The image will not be repeated. The image
on the specified page in the specified file will be required copies varies by group (such as corporate
used just once in order over the original. The image division or classes).
will not be layered over the rest of the pages of the You can program settings for the number of copies
original. and sets, sorting, slip sheets, and other options for
each group. This enables you to quickly print

6 Configure the Priority Layer.

exactly the number of copies of the number of sets
you need.
[Original]: The original will be layered on top of the
overlay image.
• You can configure up to 60 groups.
[Overlay Image]: The overlay image will be layered
• [Program] cannot be used together with
on top of the original.
[Booklet] or [Separation]. (p. 1-16 "Booklet",
p. 1-27 "Separation")

7 Touch [OK].
■ Examples of Entering the Number of
• Use an overlay image (image saved in the Copies and Sets
storage) that is the same size as the original.
The image cannot be enlarged or reduced for You can enter up to 9,999 copies and up to 99 sets.
layering. For example, to distribute a leaflet to the parents of all
first-grade students in school, you can use the [Program]
• The overlay image is to be saved in the storage
function to print the required number of copies for each
with the setting for simplex printing.
class with a single copy job.
• When the resolution of the original differs from
the resolution of the overlay image, the printout Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6
may become coarse. Make copies upon No. of 35 33 35 30 32 33
matching the [Image Quality] settings for the students people people people people people people
original and the overlay image.
To print the leaflets by group, configure the settings as
• Even when the overlay image is a color image, follows.
if the copy is set to black and white, the image
will also be copied in black and white. Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6

• If the size or orientation of the paper differs Copies 35 × 1 33 × 1 35 × 1 30 × 1 32 × 1 33 × 1

between the original and overlay image, the × Sets
overlay function will be unavailable.
Even if two classes have the same number of students
• Documents are saved in the storage in the form (such as Classes 1 and 3 or Classes 2 and 6), you can
of data that includes setting details. When configure the settings as follows to output the required
printing a document, be sure to do so with the number of copies per class.
same type of paper as that which was
configured when the document was saved in Classes 1 Classes 2 Class 4 Class 5
the storage. When you change the paper type, and 3 and 6
the printing result changes. Copies 35 × 2 33 × 2 30 × 1 32 × 1
× Sets
• If the original and the overlay image overlap on
the portions having the same color, it might be In this case, specifying [Between Sets] for [Slip sheet] will
difficult to distinguish the image of the make it easier to separate the bundles for each class.
assimilated portions.

1-24

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

■ About the Separation Settings

[Sort]
3 Enter the number of copies and sets
using the numeric keys.
When [Auto] is set, the copies are sorted in sets when
you load the original in the ADF and sorted by page when
you load the original on the platen glass.
[Uncollated]: Copies are made by page.
[Collated]: Copies are made in sets.
[Slip Sheet]
[OFF]: Slip sheets are not inserted.
1
[Between Sets]: Slip sheets are inserted between each
set.
[Between Groups]: Slip sheets are inserted between
each group.
[Paper]
Specify the paper tray in which slip sheets are loaded.
4 Touch [Separation].
The [Separation] screen is displayed.
[Number Printing]

5 Configure
[ON]: Numbers will be printed.
the sort and slip sheet
The group number and set number are printed when [Slip
Sheet] is set to [Between Sets], and only the group
and touch [OK].
number is printed when [Slip Sheet] is set to [Between
Groups].

Saving a Program
You can register up to 12 programs and call them
whenever necessary.

1 Touch [Program].
The [Program] screen is displayed. Set the [Paper] and [Number Printing] options as
well if necessary.

2 Touch
[Edit].
[No Entry], and then touch
• If you are using the optional face down
finisher, high capacity stacker, or
The program edit screen is displayed. multifunction finisher, you can configure
[Offset Output]. For more information, see
the following:
- When using the face down finisher
(p. 8-6 "Offset Output ([Program])")
- When using the high capacity stacker
(p. 8-24 "Offset Output ([Program])")
- When using the multifunction finisher
(p. 8-36 "Offset Output ([Program])")

1-25

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

6 Touch [OK].
The [Confirm] screen is displayed.
Changing the Program Settings
You can change a saved program.

7 Select [Overwrite] or [Register As].

To save by giving it a name, enter a program name
and touch [OK]. 1 Touch [Program].
The [Program] screen is displayed.
The registration is now complete.
In the [Confirm] screen, touch [Close].
2 Select a program.
8 Touch [OK].
Retrieving a Program
You can call a saved program.

1 Touch [Program].
The [Program] screen is displayed.
Sub menu

2 Select the program to call.

The registered number of copies and sets are
The following settings can be configured from the
sub menu:
displayed in a list.
• Rename
• Delete
Follow the on-screen instructions to change the
settings.

3 Touch [Edit].
For specific instructions on subsequent operations,
see steps 3 through 8 in "Saving a Program"
(p. 1-25).

3 Touch [OK].

1-26

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

• The side in which the paper is loaded

Add Cover varies depending on the tray.
[Front Cover]
You can load printed paper or colored paper into a Standard tray: Load the paper with the first
paper tray to add to the front and back of the page facing up.
printed document as a cover. Feed tray: Load the paper with the first
page facing down.
• You cannot use paper of a different size from
that of the copy paper. [Back Cover] 1
Standard tray: Load the paper with the first
• You cannot use [Add Cover] with [Mixed Size
page facing down.
Original] or [Page Border] at the same time.
(p. 1-13 "Mixed Size Original", p. 1-19 "Page Feed tray: Load the paper with the first
Border") page facing up.
See "Loading the Paper" (p. 31).
[Binding Edge] • Change the [Paper Selection] settings
Specify the binding edge. according to the loaded paper. (p. 1-8
[Front Cover] "Paper Selection")
Set this option to [ON] to add a cover to the front of each
printout.
[Back Cover]
Set this option to [ON] to add a cover to the back of each
Separation
printout.
Insert a slip sheet between pages or sets, or to
[Paper Tray]
separate jobs.
Specify the feed tray that is loaded with cover paper.

• When loading special paper to be used as slip

1 Touch [Add Cover].

The [Add Cover] screen is displayed.
sheets, it is recommended that [Auto Selection]
be set to [OFF] for the paper tray for slip sheets.
(p. 1-8 "Changing the Paper Tray Setting")

2 Select the binding side. [Slip Sheet]

[OFF]: Slip sheets are not inserted.

3 Configure the cover settings.

Select [OFF] or [ON] for the front and back covers.
[Between Sorts]: A slip sheet is inserted for each unit
specified in [Sort].
[After a Job]: A slip sheet is inserted after every printed
job.
4 Touch the paper tray.
The [Select Tray] screen is displayed.
[Paper]
Specify the paper tray in which slip sheets are loaded.
[Number Printing]

5 Select a paper tray and touch [OK]. [OFF]: Numbers are not printed.
[1 2 3 ...]: Numbers are stamped on slip sheets in

6 Touch [OK].
numerical order (1, 2, 3...).
[A B C ...]: Letters are stamped on slip sheets in
alphabetical order (A, B, C... Z, AA, AB...). (Up to ZZZ)
7 Load the cover paper.

1-27

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

The text is printed at the bottom (within approx. 5 mm

(7/32") of the edge) or top (within approx. 5 mm (7/32") of Binding Margin
the edge) of the sheet.
Specify the binding margin.
Output
orientation • You cannot use the [Binding Margin] function
with the [Mixed Size Original], [Booklet], or
or [Page Border] function. (p. 1-13 "Mixed Size
Original", p. 1-16 "Booklet", p. 1-19 "Page
Border")
Standard paper, Non- Non-standard paper
standard paper specified not registered in this [Binding Edge]
in [Paper Selection] machine Specify the binding edge.
Width

1 Touch [Separation].
The [Separation] screen is displayed.
Enter the width using [
[Auto Reduction]
], [ ], or the numeric keys.

When this is set to [ON], the image will be automatically

reduced to fit on the paper in order to prevent the edges
2 Select the position where slip sheets
are to be inserted.
from not being printed even when a binding margin is
configured.

3 Touch the paper tray.

The [Select Tray] screen is displayed.
1 Touch [Binding Margin].
The [Binding Margin] screen is displayed.

4 Select the paper tray for slip sheets

and touch [OK].
2 Specify the binding margin.
• Select [Binding Edge].
• Use [ ], [ ], or the numeric keys to enter the

5 Configure [Number Printing]. width.

• Turn [Auto Reduction] to [ON] in order to prevent
the edges from not being printed even when a
6 Touch [OK]. binding margin is configured.

• If you are using the optional face down finisher,

high capacity stacker, or multifunction finisher,
3 Touch [OK].
you can configure [Offset Output]. For more
information, see the following:
- When using the face down finisher
(p. 8-6 "Offset Output ([Separation])")
- When using the high capacity stacker
(p. 8-24 "Offset Output ([Separation])")
- When using the multifunction finisher
(p. 8-37 "Offset Output ([Separation])")

1-28

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Settings

Staple/Punch Output Tray

If you are using the optional face down finisher or If you are using the optional stacking tray, high
multifunction finisher, the staple function is capacity stacker, or multifunction finisher, you can
available. The binding margin can also be select the trays for output of the printed materials.
configured. For more information, see the following:
When using the optional multifunction finisher, you • When using the stacking tray (p. 8-16 "Output
can configure holes to punch. Tray") 1
For more information, see the following: • When using the high capacity stacker (p. 8-25
• When using the face down finisher (p. 8-7 "Output Tray")
"Staple") • When using the multifunction finisher (p. 8-41
• When using the multifunction finisher (p. 8-37 "Output Tray")
"Staple/Punch")

Face Up/Down
Fold
If you are using the optional stacking tray, high
When using the optional multifunction finisher, you capacity stacker, or multifunction finisher, you can
can configure how the paper is folded. configure whether to output the printouts face up or
For more information, see "Fold" (p. 8-39) in face down.
"Optional Equipment". For more information, see the following:
• When using the stacking tray (p. 8-16 "Face Up/
Down")
• When using the high capacity stacker (p. 8-25
Slow Printing "Face Up/Down")
• When using the multifunction finisher (p. 8-41
You can slow down the printing speed. This also "Face Up/Down")
reduces the amount of noise produced by the
machine when printing jobs.

[OFF], [ON] Output Tray Relay

1 Touch [Slow Printing].

The [Slow Printing] screen is displayed.
When using the auto-control stacking tray, high
capacity stacker, or multifunction finisher, the
output tray switches automatically when the tray
that is being used becomes full.
2 Touch [ON]. For more information, see the following:
• When using the auto-control stacking tray

3 Touch [OK]. (p. 8-17 "Output Tray Relay")

• When using the high capacity stacker (p. 8-25
"Output Tray Relay")
• When using the multifunction finisher (p. 8-41
"Output Tray Relay")

1-29

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Paper Tray Relay Interrupt Copy

Use this option to automatically feed paper from a This function allows you to pause the job being
different tray with the same paper size and paper printed to copy another document.
type when the selected tray runs out of paper.
• The following functions are not available for
[OFF], [ON] interrupt copy:
[Program], [Slip Sheet], [Add Cover], [ADF Scan

1 Touch [Paper Tray Relay].

The [Paper Tray Relay] screen is displayed.
& Pause]

• When performing an interrupt copy with a job

being output to the multifunction finisher, the

2 Touch [ON].
following settings are unavailable:
[Staple/Punch], [Fold], [Binding],
[Separating Books], [Output Tray], [Face Up/

3 Touch [OK]. Down], [Output Tray Relay]

• An interrupt copy cannot be made while a job

using the staple function or offset output
Auto Image Rotation function is being processed with the face down
finisher. The interrupt copy function is available
when any one of the optional stacking tray, high
This rotates the image 90 degrees automatically capacity stacker, or multifunction finisher is
when the orientations of the original and paper do connected.
not match, even if the paper size loaded in the tray
matches the size of the loaded original. Normally,
this setting is set to [ON]. 1 Press the [Interrupt] key.
The interruption screen is displayed.

2 Load the original and press the

[Start] key.
• You can continue with the interrupt copy operation
while the [Ready to copy. (Interrupting)] message
is displayed.

3 After copying is completed, press

the [Interrupt] key to cancel interrupt
copy.
Printing of the paused job resumes.
• Interrupt copy is also canceled when the machine
has not been operated for 60 seconds.

1-30

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Copy Mode Function Buttons

Additional Copy
This function prints out a copy of the original that 1
was copied last. The original does not need to be
scanned again.

• Additional Copy cannot be made in the following

cases:
- When the administrator has not permitted the
use of the additional copy function
Function buttons
- When auto reset has been executed after
copying the original
- When the user is logged out
Favorites
Settings can be called whenever necessary. The 1 Touch [Additional Copy] after the
copy job is finished.
recommended settings are pre-registered as
favorites. The [Additional Copy] screen is displayed.
Registering frequently used settings can be useful.
For more information, see "Adding to Favorites"
(p. 1-33). 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the
number of copies.

1 Touch [Favorites].
The [Favorites] screen is displayed. 3 Touch [OK].
Printing of additional copies starts.

2 Select one of the favorites.

Set values are shown in a list on the screen.
The following settings can be configured from the
sub menu:
• Rename
• Delete

3 Touch [OK].
• You cannot rename or delete favorites that are
registered as factory settings.

1-31

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

Sample Copy Check Setting

The printing stops after one copy has been printed. Use this option to check the current settings.
This function allows you to check the output before
making a large number of printouts.
1 Touch [Check Setting].
The [Check Setting] screen is displayed. Check the
• If you set [Sort] to [Collated], you can use this
current settings.
function to make one copy as a sample. (p. 1-11
"Sort") The following settings can be configured from the
sub menu:

1 Touch [Sample Copy].

The [Sample Copy] screen is displayed.
• Add to Favorites
• Save as Default
• Setting Confirmation Print

2 Touch [ON]. 2 Touch [Back].

3 Touch [OK].
4 Press the [Start] key.
The [Making sample copies] screen is displayed,
and copying of the original starts. The current status
is displayed on the screen.
• The copying can be paused with the [Stop] key.
(p. 1-3 "Canceling Copying")
• Touch [Slow Printing] to slow down the printing
speed. This also reduces the amount of noise
produced by the machine when printing jobs.

The [Confirm] screen appears after a sample copy is

printed.
You can change the following settings:
• [Change Setting] (p. 1-4 "Changing Settings during
Copying")
• [Maintenance] (p. 1-4 "Performing Maintenance
During Copying")

1-32

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Mode Function Buttons

Custom Menu Editing Favorites

You can change the display order of favorites.
You can register favorites and default settings, and
edit the button order.
1 Touch [Custom Menu].
The [Custom Menu] screen is displayed.
Adding to Favorites
1
Register the settings and the number of copies for 2 Touch [Favorites Create/Edit].
a setting button as a favorite. You can register up to
30 favorites.
Perform the operation while the details you wish to
3 Touch [Edit].
The [Edit Favorites] screen is displayed.
register are configured.

4 Select one of the favorites.

1 Touch [Custom Menu].
The [Custom Menu] screen is displayed.

2 Touch [Favorites Create/Edit].

Sub menu

Favorites with a lock icon cannot be edited.

The following settings can be configured from the
sub menu:

3 Touch [Create].
The [Add to Favorites] screen is displayed. Check
• Check Setting
• Rename
the current settings. • Delete

4 Touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Up] or [Down] to set up the

order.
5 Enter the registration name and
touch [OK].
The settings are registered as a favorite.

6 Touch [Close].
• The following setting cannot be registered as
favorites:
- [Paper Selection]

1-33

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

6 Configure
setting.
the [View Favorites]
4 Touch [OK].
The settings are registered as default settings.
• When you select [Common], the common favorites
and the favorites registered as factory settings are
displayed. 5 Touch [Close].
• When you select [Personal], the personal favorites
are displayed. • The following setting cannot be registered as
• When you select both [Common] and [Personal], default settings:
the common favorites, the favorites registered as - [Paper Selection]
factory settings, and the personal favorites are
displayed.

Clearing Defaults
• [View Favorites] may not be displayed
depending on the configuration by the Clear a default value registered by an individual
administrator. In this case, the common
and return the value to the common default value.
favorites and the favorites registered as
factory settings are displayed.

1 Touch [Custom Menu].

7 Touch [OK]. The [Custom Menu] screen is displayed.

8 Touch [Close]. 2 Touch [Default Setting].

Saving as Default
3 Touch [Clear].
The [Initialize] screen is displayed.

You can register the values and the number of

copies set using the setting buttons as default 4 Touch [OK].
The default values are cleared.
settings.
Perform the operation while the details you wish to
register are configured.
5 Touch [Close].
1 Touch [Custom Menu].
The [Custom Menu] screen is displayed.
• The administrator privilege is required in order
to clear a common default value. Contact your
administrator for details.

2 Touch [Default Setting].

3 Touch [Entry].
The [Save as Default] screen is displayed. Check
the current settings.

1-34

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Copy Mode Function Buttons

Editing Button Order

This function changes the arrangement of setting
buttons.

1 Touch [Custom Menu].

The [Custom Menu] screen is displayed.
1
2 Touch [Button Order Setting].
The [Button Order Setting] screen is displayed.

3 Select one of the setting buttons.

4 Touch
order.
[Up] or [Down] to set up the

5 Touch [OK].
The arrangement of the setting buttons is
completed.

6 Touch [Close].
• The administrator privilege is required in order
to configure the common button order. Contact
your administrator for details.

1-35

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 1 Copying

1-36

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Scanning

You can scan a paper original and save this as data.

Select a folder to save the data in to suit the intended purpose.
Data that has been scanned can be saved on a computer on the network, sent as an e-mail
attachment, or saved on the internal hard drive of this machine and downloaded from the RISO
console.

Overview of Scan Operations ...............................p. 2-2

1. Load the original.

2. Touch [Scan] on the [Home1] screen.

3. Specify an address or destination.

4. Change the settings.

5. Check the preview display.

6. Press the [Start] key.

Scan Settings .........................................................p. 2-6

This section explains each scan setting in detail.

Scan Mode Function Buttons .............................p. 2-11

2
This section explains the functions available in the Scan mode.

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 2 Scanning
Scanning

Overview of Scan Operations

This section explains the basic scan operations. ■ On the Platen Glass

1 Open the original cover.

Procedure
2 Load the original.
● 1 Load the original. Load the original face down on the glass.
Align the corner of the original with the upper-left
For more information on the types of originals that corner of the glass.
can be used, see "Originals" in the "Safety
Information".

• The machine cannot scan the area within 1 mm

(3/64") of the edge of the paper.
(Any part of the image within this area will be
lost.)

■ In the ADF
3 Close the original cover.
1 Load the original in the ADF.
Align the originals and place them face up.
• Open and close the original cover gently.

● 2 Touch [Scan] on the [Home1]

screen.
Select [Mail], [PC], or [Console].

2 Slide the original guides to match

the width of the originals.

2-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Scan Operations

● 3 Specify an address or 3 Touch [OK].

destination.
• To send to an address that is not displayed
If you select [Mail] or [PC], specify the address/ in [Mail Address Book], touch [Direct Input]
destination for the scanned data. to register a new address.

• To remove an address from [Selected], you

• If you select [Console], you do not need to
can either clear all addresses by touching
specify the destination. The scanned data is
[Clear All] or select the address to remove
saved to the internal hard disk of this machine.
and touch [Clear].

• Touch [Sender] to display the [Sender]

■ When you have selected [Mail] screen and enter the sender's name.

You can attach the scanned data to e-mail messages

and send them.
■ When you have selected [PC]
2
The scanned data is saved on a computer on the
1 Touch [Address].
network.
The [Address] screen is displayed.

1 Touch [Destination].
2 Select an address from [Mail
The [Destination] screen is displayed.
Address Book].
2 Select a destination from [PC
Address Book].

Index

The selected address appears in [Selected].

• You can touch the index to narrow down the Index
list of addresses registered in the address
book. The selected destination appears in [Selected].
• You can touch the index to narrow down the
list of destinations registered in the address
book.

2-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 2 Scanning

3 Touch [OK]. ● 6 Press the [Start] key.

The [Scanning] screen is displayed, and scanning
• To save data to a computer not listed in [PC
of the original starts. The current status is displayed
Address Book], touch [Direct Input] to
on the screen.
register a new destination. For more
information on the destination server, • After the [Confirm] screen is displayed, touch
contact your administrator. [Close].
The original is scanned and saved.
• To remove a destination from [Selected],
you can either clear all destinations by
touching [Clear All] or select the destination ■ To cancel scanning
to remove and touch [Clear].

● 4 Change the settings.

1 Press the [Stop] key.
Scanning is stopped and the Scan screen is
displayed.
Specify the detailed settings for scanning.
For more information on the functions that can be
• When you select [Console] to scan data, the
configured, see "List of Settings" (p. 2-5).
scanned data is saved to the internal hard disk
of this machine. The saved data can be
downloaded to a user's computer using the
● 5 Check the preview display. RISO Console. See "[Scan] Menu Screen"
(p. 6-9) in "RISO Console".
1 Touch [Preview before sending]. • The storage period for the scanned data is
By touching [Continue] in the [Confirm] screen, configured by the administrator.
the scanning of the original starts and the
preview is displayed.
• RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION is not
responsible for the loss of any data on the
machine's internal hard disk that may occur
during the use of this machine. For data
protection, it is recommended to back up data in
advance.

To switch pages, touch [ ] or [ ].

To change the address or destination, touch
[Change Address] or [Storage Directory].

2-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Scan Operations

List of Settings
The following is a list of settings available in Scan mode.

Setting item Use this item to: See

Document Name View and specify the document name when saving the scanned data. p. 2-6
Color Mode Specify the color mode of the data to be scanned. p. 2-7
Scanning Size Specify the scanning size for originals to be scanned. p. 2-7
File Format Specify the file format for saving the scanned data. p. 2-7
Duplex / Simplex Specify the sides of the original to be scanned. p. 2-8
Scanning Level Adjust the scanning level. p. 2-8 2
Original Orientation Specify the orientation of the original. p. 2-8
Resolution Specify the resolution for scanning originals. p. 2-8
Mixed Size Original Scan the original containing the different paper sizes. p. 2-9
Page Size Specify the size for saving the scanned data. p. 2-9
Book Shadow Erasure Remove shadows that appear in the center of images when an open p. 2-9
book is scanned.
Page Split Scan double-spread pages and split them into two parts (right and p. 2-9
left).
PIN code Assign PIN codes when saving scanned jobs on the internal hard disk p. 2-9
of this machine.
Original Type Select the original type to perform the appropriate image processing p. 2-10
and save the scanned data.
Gamma Correction Adjust the color balance (CMYK) of the scanned data. p. 2-10
Image Control Specify the image processing appropriate for the original. p. 2-10
Base Color Level Make the background color (base color) lighter so that the text is p. 2-10
easier to read.
Reproduction Size Enlarge or shrink the scanned data. p. 2-10
Favorites Call frequently used settings. p. 2-11
Check Setting Check the current settings. p. 2-11
Preview before sending Scan and display the original before sending or saving. p. 2-11
Custom Menu Register favorites and default settings, and edit the button order. You p. 2-12
can register and edit the address books as well.

2-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Scan Settings

[Add Owner Name]

Specify whether to add the owner's name to the
document names set up in [Input Method].
Select [OFF] not to add the owner's name.
Select [Prepend] to add the owner's name before
document names and name them using the following
format:
Owner's name - Document name - Page number_Serial
number.extension
Example: J.Smith-SCAN-0001-0001_0001.tif
Setting buttons Select [Append] to add the owner's name after document
names and name them using the following format:
Document name - Owner's name - Page number_Serial

Document Name number.extension

Example: SCAN-0001-J.Smith-0001_0001.tif

You can view the document name to be used when

• The serial number is added only when
saving the scanned data. duplication of a file name occurs.
Touch [Document Name] to set the document
name.
1 Touch [Document Name].
The [Document Name Setting] screen is displayed.

2 Select an option for [Input Method].

When [Direct Input] is selected, enter a document
name and touch [OK].

3 Select
name.
whether to add the owner's

[Document Name]
Among the information specified in [Input Method] and 4 Touch [OK].
[Add Owner Name], the [Document Name] and [Owner]
information is displayed. • For more information on text input, see
[Input Method] "Entering Text" (p. 28).
Select [Auto] to set the document name automatically.
• For [Direct Input], you can use upper and lower
Select [Direct Input] to enter a document name of your case letters.
choice.
If you select [Auto], the document is assigned a name
beginning with "SCAN-" and followed by a serial number
(0001 to 9999).

2-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Scan Settings

Color Mode File Format

Select the color mode of the data to be scanned. Specify the file format for saving the scanned data.

[Auto] [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [PDF/A]

The machine automatically determines if the original is in
color or black and white. If it is determined that the File format Setting item
original is in color, it is converted to RGB data and saved. [PDF] [Image Quality]
If it is determined that the original is in black and white, it [Details]
is converted to black data and saved. [ZIP]
[Full Color] [Single Page]
[Password Setting]
Originals are converted to RGB data and saved.
[User Password]
[Grayscale] [Owner Password]
2
Color originals and color photos are converted to
[TIFF] [Details]
grayscale data and saved. [ZIP]
[Black]
[JPEG] [Image Quality]
Originals are saved as black and white (binary) data. [Details]
[ZIP]

1 Touch [Color Mode].

The [Color mode] screen is displayed.
[PDF/A] [Image Quality]

[Image Quality]
[1: Low], [2], [3], [4], [5: High]

2 Select the color mode. [PDF Password]

Set the user password and owner password.

3 Touch [OK]. [ZIP]

This option appears when sending the scanned data via
e-mail or sending the scanned data to a computer on the
network. Select [ON] to compress the scanned data into
Scanning Size a zip file.

Specify the size of the original to be scanned. • When saving the scanned data to the internal
For more information, see "Scanning Size" hard disk of this machine, the scanned data is
(p. 1-10) in "Copying". compressed into a zip file.

[Single Page]
Select [ON] to save the scanned data in single pages.

1 Touch [File Format].

The [File Format] screen is displayed.

2 Select the file format to use for

saving the scanned data.

2-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 2 Scanning

3 Change the settings as needed. 3 Specify

scan.
the sides of the original to

4 Touch [OK]. If you have selected [Double-sided], specify the

paging direction.

• If the scanned data is only one file, the scanned

data will not be compressed. 4 Touch [OK].
• If [File Format] is set to [PDF], the [ZIP] option
will become available when [Single Page] is set
to [ON]. Scanning Level
• [User Password] that can be entered when
Adjust the scanning level.
[PDF] is selected as the file format is necessary
to open the documents later. [Owner Password] For more information, see "Scanning Level"
is necessary to set the access rights to (p. 1-12) in "Copying".
documents, specifically, the permission to print
and edit.
The [PIN code] (p. 2-9) for this machine is
different from the passwords mentioned above;
Original Orientation
the PIN code serves the purpose of protecting
the scan jobs to be saved in the internal hard Specify the orientation of the original.
disk and the print jobs sent from a computer. For more information, see "Original Orientation"
(p. 1-10) in "Copying".

Duplex / Simplex
Resolution
Specify the sides of the original to be scanned.
Specify the resolution for scanning originals.
• [Duplex / Simplex] and [Book Shadow Erasure]
[200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], [600 dpi]
cannot be used together. (p. 2-9 "Book Shadow
Erasure")

[Single-sided], [Double-sided]
1 Touch [Resolution].
The [Resolution] screen is displayed.
[Paging Direction]
Specify whether pages are opened right/left or top/
bottom.
2 Select a resolution.
3 Touch [OK].
[Original Orientation] (p. 2-8 "Original Orientation")

1 Touch [Duplex/Simplex].
The [Duplex/Simplex] screen is displayed.

2 Touch [Original Orientation].

Select [Top Side Up] or [Top Side Left].

2-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Scan Settings

Mixed Size Original Book Shadow Erasure

Use this option when multiple different original Remove shadows that appear in the center of
sizes are used in the original. The sizes that can images when an open book is scanned.
co-exist are "A4-LEF and A3", "B5-LEF and B4", For more information, see "Book Shadow Erasure"
and "Letter-LEF and Ledger". (p. 1-13) in "Copying".
For more information, see step 2 and subsequent
steps under "Mixed Size Original" (p. 1-13) in • [Book Shadow Erasure] and [Duplex / Simplex]
"Copying". cannot be used together. (p. 2-8 "Duplex /
Simplex")

Page Size 2
Page Split
Specify the size for saving the scanned data.
Use this option to scan double-spread pages and
[Auto]
split them into two parts (right and left).
Automatically sets the page size based on the settings For more information, see "Page Split" (p. 1-14) in
for the [Scanning Size] and [Reproduction Size]. "Copying".
[Standard]
Saves the data in the selected standard size.
[Custom]
Saves as a non-standard page sizes registered by the
PIN code
administrator in advance.
[Manual] Assign PIN codes when saving scanned jobs on
the internal hard disk of this machine. The PIN
Specify the non-standard page size that is not registered
code set here is required when using the RISO
and save as this size.
Console to download to a computer.

1 Touch [Page Size].

The [Page Size] screen is displayed.
[OFF], [ON]
Enter value (up to 8 characters)

2 Select the page size. 1 Touch [PIN code].

The [PIN code] screen is displayed.

3 Touch [OK]. 2 Touch [ON].

3 Use the numeric keys to enter the
PIN code.

4 Touch [OK].

2-9

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 2 Scanning

Original Type Base Color Level

Select the type of original to perform the This function makes the background color (base
appropriate image processing for saving the color) lighter so that the text is easier to read when
scanned data. scanning text originals with a background color or
originals printed on colored paper.
[Line/Photo]
For more information, see "Base Color Level"
Select this when the original has both text and photos. (p. 1-22) in "Copying".
[Line]
Select this when the original has text or illustrations.
[Photo]
Select this when the original has photos.
Reproduction Size
Enlarge or shrink the scanned data.
1 Touch [Original Type].
The [Original Type] screen is displayed. [100% (1:1)]
The data will not be enlarged or shrunk.

2
[Auto]
Select the original type.
Automatically sets the reproduction size based on the
settings for the [Scanning Size] and [Page Size].

3 Touch [OK]. [Reduce], [Enlarge]

The data is enlarged or shrunk with the selected
reproduction size.

Gamma Correction Manual

The data is enlarged or shrunk with the user-defined
reproduction size.
Adjust the color balance of the scanned data.
For more information, see "Gamma Correction"
(p. 1-21) in "Copying".
1 Touch [Reproduction Size].
The [Reproduction Size] screen is displayed.
• When [Color Mode] has been set to [Grayscale]
or [Black], the gamma value can only be
adjusted for K. The gamma value cannot be
corrected for C-R, M-G, or Y-B. (p. 2-7 "Color
2 Specify the reproduction size.
To use a user-defined reproduction size, touch [ ]
Mode")
or [ ] to specify the size. You can also enter the
number using the numeric keys.

Image Control
3 Touch [OK].
Specify the image processing appropriate for the
original.
For more information, see "Image Control" (p. 1-21)
in "Copying".

2-10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Scan Mode Function Buttons

Preview before sending

You can scan and display the original before
sending or saving.

1 Touch [Preview before sending].

The [Confirm] screen is displayed. 2

Function buttons 2 Touch [Continue] to start the scan.

The preview screen is displayed. Check the scan
results.

Favorites
Settings can be called whenever necessary. The
3 Press the [Start] key.
The data is sent or saved.
recommended settings are pre-registered as
favorites. Registering frequently used settings can • You can change the e-mail address with
be useful. [Change Address] or change the destination
For more information, see "Favorites" (p. 1-31) in where the scanned data will be saved with
[Storage Directory].
"Copying".
• When the scanned data contains multiple
pages, flick the screen to move between
different pages. You can also move between
Check Setting pages by touching [ ] or [ ].

Use this option to check the current settings.

1 Touch [Check Setting].

The [Check Setting] screen is displayed. Check the
current settings.
The following settings can be configured from the
sub menu:
• Add to Favorites
• Save as Default
• Setting Confirmation Print

2 Touch [Back].

2-11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 2 Scanning

Custom Menu 3 Touch [Create].

The [Create] screen is displayed.

You can register favorites and default settings, and

edit the button order. You can register and edit the
address books as well.

Adding to Favorites / Editing

Favorites
Use this function to register the settings configured
with setting buttons as a favorite. You can register
up to 30 favorites.
For more information, see "Adding to Favorites" 4 Enter an e-mail address.
(p. 1-33) and "Editing Favorites" (p. 1-33) in
"Copying". 5 Enter the name of the recipient.
• The following settings cannot be registered as
favorites: 6 Specify the index.
- [Document Name], [PDF Password] in [File
Format], [PIN code] 7 Touch [OK].
The address is registered in the address book.

Adding to the Address Book 8 Set the [Display Address Book]

option.
You can register addresses and destinations in Specify whether to show a common recipient or an
address books. individual recipient on the address book.

■ When you have selected [Mail]

9 Touch [Close].
1 Touch [Custom Menu].
The [Custom Menu] screen is displayed.
■ When you have selected [PC]
Register a computer as a scanned data destination.
For more information, see "Scan Data Directory" in the

2 Touch [Address Book Add/Edit].

The [Edit Address Book] screen is displayed.
"Administrator's Guide".

2-12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Scan Mode Function Buttons

Editing the Address Book Deleting an Address or a

Destination
You can edit the personal addresses and
destinations registered in the address books. You can delete personal addresses and
destinations from address books.
■ When you have selected [Mail]
■ When you have selected [Mail]
1 Touch [Custom Menu].
The [Custom Menu] screen is displayed.
1 Touch [Custom Menu].
The [Custom Menu] screen is displayed.

2 Touch [Address Book Add/Edit]. 2

The [Edit Address Book] screen is displayed.
2 Touch [Address Book Add/Edit].
The [Edit Address Book] screen is displayed.

3 Select an address and touch [Edit].

The [Edit] screen is displayed.
3 Select an address and touch
[Delete].
4 Change Settings. The [Confirm] screen is displayed.

5 Touch [OK].
The address settings are changed.
4 Touch [OK].
The address is deleted from the address book.

6 Touch [Close]. 5 Touch [Close].

■ When you have selected [PC] ■ When you have selected [PC]
Change the settings registered as a scanned data Delete the destination that you registered as a scanned
destination. data destination.
For more information, see "Scan Data Directory" in the For more information, see "Scan Data Directory" in the
"Administrator's Guide". "Administrator's Guide".

2-13

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 2 Scanning

Saving / Clearing Defaults

You can register the values entered using the
setting buttons as default settings.
For more information, see "Saving as Default"
(p. 1-34) and "Clearing Defaults" (p. 1-34) in
"Copying".

• The following settings cannot be registered as

default settings:
- [Document Name], [PDF Password] in [File
Format], [PIN code]

Editing Button Order

This function changes the arrangement of setting
buttons.
For more information, see "Editing Button Order"
(p. 1-35) in "Copying".

2-14

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printing

Connect this machine and a computer to the network to use this machine as a printer.
By using the printer driver, you can send the print data to this machine from a computer.

Overview of Print Operations Overview of Print Operations

(Printer Driver) ...................... p. 3-2 (Print Mode)...........................p. 3-3

1. Open the printer driver screen. 1. Touch [Print] on the [Home1]

screen.

2. Change the settings. 2. Select a job.

3. Click [OK].
3. Press the [Start] key.

4. Click [Print] or [OK].

Printer Driver Settings .........................................p. 3-9

This section explains each printer driver setting in detail.

Print Mode Function Buttons ............................p. 3-35

This section explains the functions available in Print mode.

3
ComColor GD Series User's Guide
 3 Printing
Printing

Overview of Print Operations

This chapter describes the basic operations to use ● 3 Click [OK].

this machine as a printer.
The print dialog box is displayed.

• If the [Collate] check box in the print dialog box

Procedure From the is selected, remove the check mark. To print by
collating copies, set [Sort] in the [Basic] tab to
Printer Driver [Collated].

● 1 Open the printer driver ● 4 Click [Print] or [OK].

screen. The print data is sent to this machine.

• When using the external system link function,

1 Select the print option in the touch [External System Link] on the [Home1]
application on the computer. screen and you can print jobs saved on an
The print dialog box is displayed. external system.
For more information, see "External System
Link" (p. 3-36).
2 Check the printer name and click
[Properties] or [Details].
The button names are different depending on
the application.

● 2 Change the settings.

For more information on the settings that can be
configured, see "List of Settings" (p. 3-6).
• To restore all settings on the printer driver screen to
their default values, click [Restore Default].

• The [Original Type] and [Paper Type] settings of

the printer driver greatly affect the print quality.
Change the settings according to use
conditions.

3-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Print Operations

• When a job name exceeds the character limit,

Procedure From Print the first half of the job name is omitted and
Mode displayed as "...".

• In the following cases, the job name is displayed

as "*****":
• Depending on the settings configured by the
- Jobs with the [Hide Job Name] check box
administrator, printing may be performed simply
selected on the printer driver (p. 3-28 "PIN
by logging in.
Code")
- Jobs that belong to users other than the user
● 1 Touch [Print] on the [Home1] currently logged in when [Job Name Display]
is set to [OFF] on the administrator menu
screen.
● 3 Press the [Start] key.
The selected job is printed.

■ When printing a job with a PIN code 3

The PIN code entry screen is displayed. Enter the PIN
code using the numeric keys, and touch [Continue].

Changing Settings During

● 2 Select a job. Printing

1 Press the [Stop] key.

The [Suspending] screen is displayed.

2 Touch [Change Setting].

The [Change Setting] screen is displayed.

Icons displayed on thumbnails

: Job with a PIN code
: Broken job (Broken data or data with problems)
None: All other jobs sent from computers

The following settings can be configured from the sub

menu:
• Details
• Change Setting
• Delete

3-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

3 Change Settings.
You can change the following settings:
Performing Maintenance
During Printing
• Slow Printing (p. 1-29 "Slow Printing")
• Print Density (p. 1-12 "Print Density")
• Paper Selection (p. 1-8 "Paper Selection")
• Image Position (p. 1-22 "Image Position")
1 Press the [Stop] key.
The [Suspending] screen is displayed.

• If you touch [Proof], only one copy of the

page that was being processed when the 2 Touch [Maintenance].
The [Maintenance] screen is displayed.
[Stop] key is pressed is printed.

4 Touch [Close]. 3 Change Settings.

You can change the following settings:

5 Touch [Continue].
• Print Head Cleaning
• Front Cover Release
The print job is resumed with the changed settings • Online/Offline
applied.
• Paper Guide Control

• Touch [Online/Offline] to display the

[Online/Offline] screen. You can
monopolize the printer by setting [Online/
Offline] to [OFF].

• For more information on [Print Head

Cleaning] and [Front Cover Release], see
"Maintenance" (p. 9-2) in the "Appendix".

• If you touch [Proof], only one copy of the

page that was being processed when the
[Stop] key is pressed is printed.

• If you are using the optional auto-control

stacking tray or high capacity stacker, you
can adjust the position of the stacking tray
with [Paper Guide Control]. For more
information, see "Maintenance" (p. 9-2) in
the "Appendix".

4 Touch [Close].
5 Touch [Continue].
The print job is resumed with the adjustment applied.

3-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Print Operations

Printer Driver Screen

Settings can be configured from the printer driver screen.

Tab

Preview

Printer Configuration
and Output Tray

• Tab: Click a tab to switch the screen.

• Preview: Displays a preview image of the document to be printed. The original size, paper size, and
enlarge/reduce percentage are displayed under the image.
• Printer configuration and output tray: The connected optional components are displayed as an illustration.
The output tray is shown with an arrow.

• Clicking [Restore Default] restores all settings on the printer driver screen to their default values.

• When optional equipment is connected, first configure the settings in [Printer Configuration] under the
[Environment] tab to use certain functions. The unavailable functions are grayed out. (p. 3-31 "[Environment]
Tab")

3-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

List of Settings

List of Printer Driver Settings

The following is a list of the settings that can be configured via the printer driver.

Setting item Use this item to: See

[Basic] Tab
Color Mode Select a color mode. p. 3-9
Duplex / Simplex Specify the sides of the paper that are printed on. p. 3-9
Copies Enter the number of copies to print. p. 3-10
Print and Pause Stop the machine after printing one set, to check the printing result. p. 3-10
Sort Specify the paper output method when printing multiple copies. p. 3-10
Original Size Specify the paper size and orientation of the original. p. 3-10
Mixed Size Original Print the data containing pages of the different page sizes. p. 3-11
Zoom Specify enlargement or reduction of original images before printing, if p. 3-11
needed.
Paper Size Specify the size of paper for printing. p. 3-11
Paper Tray Specify the tray where paper for printing is loaded. p. 3-12
Paper Type Specify the type of printing paper. p. 3-12
Output and Select the output for the document data sent from a computer. p. 3-13
Destination If other than [Print] is selected for [Output], specify the destination by
pressing [Details].
Add to Favorites Register the current settings in the Favorites tab. p. 3-14
[Favorites] Tab
List Check the settings registered as favorites. p. 3-14
Edit Favorites Edit the registered favorites. p. 3-14
Open File Open a saved favorites file. p. 3-15
Save in File Save a favorite as a dedicated file format with the extension ".uds". p. 3-15
Add to Favorites Register the current settings in the Favorites tab. p. 3-15
[Layout] Tab
Combine Combine multiple continuous pages. p. 3-15
Image Repeat Print the same page multiple times on one sheet. p. 3-16
Booklet Specify the imposition for middle-binding booklets. p. 3-16
Watermark Specify the background watermark to be added to document pages. p. 3-17
Stamp Stamp the page number, date, or text in the header or footer. p. 3-18
Image Position Specify this when adjusting the print position. p. 3-19
Rotation Specify the print orientation. p. 3-20
Add to Favorites Register the current settings in the Favorites tab. p. 3-20

3-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Print Operations

Setting item Use this item to: See

[Finishing] Tab
Binding Edge Specify the binding margin. p. 3-20
Staple Select the stapling position.
When using the optional face down finisher p. 8-4
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-28
Punch Specify the punch position. p. 8-30
(When using the optional multifunction finisher)
Fold Specify the fold of the printing paper. (When using the optional p. 8-30
multifunction finisher with the folder unit)
Booklet Binding Specify the binding method. p. 8-32
(When using the optional multifunction finisher)
Offset Output Specify the timing to offset output.
When using the optional face down finisher p. 8-6
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-23 3
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-34
Slip Sheet Specify where to insert slip sheets between printouts. p. 3-22
Add Cover Add front and back covers to the printout. p. 3-23
Output Tray Specify the output tray.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray or wide stacking p. 8-16
tray
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-23
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-35
Output Tray Relay Switch the output tray automatically when the output tray becomes full.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray p. 8-16
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-24
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-35
Mail Making Create enveloped mail with mail form paper and printed materials. p. 3-23
(When using the optional Wrapping Envelope Finisher)
Perfect Binding Configure the settings for creating booklets with the Perfect Binder. p. 3-23
(When using the optional Perfect Binder)
Add to Favorites Register the current settings in the Favorites tab. p. 3-23
[Image] Tab
Original Type Specify whether to emphasize the image quality of photos or text for the p. 3-24
printout.
Print Density Specify the print density. p. 3-24
Image Quality Specify the print resolution. p. 3-24
Line Smoothing Smooth the outline of text or illustrations. p. 3-24
Screening Specify the halftone processing method. p. 3-25
Gamma Correction Adjust the lightness, chroma, contrast, and gamma value of red, green, p. 3-25
and blue.
Barcode Area Specify the barcode area to make the barcode suitable for reading. p. 3-26
Definition
Envelope Imaging Specify the image processing for envelope printing. p. 3-27

3-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

Setting item Use this item to: See

Thin line Enhance Prevent fine lines in the original from disappearing. p. 3-27
Add to Favorites Register the current settings in the Favorites tab. p. 3-27
[Advanced] Tab
Owner Specify an owner name of your choice. p. 3-28
Job Name Specify a desired job name. p. 3-28
PIN Code Add a PIN code to data. p. 3-28
Job Comment Add a comment to a job. p. 3-28
Program Specify the number of copies by group (such as corporate division or p. 3-28
class). You can quickly print exactly the number of copies of the number
of sets you need.
Slow Printing Decrease the printing speed. This also reduces the amount of noise p. 3-30
produced by the machine when printing jobs.
Blank Page Detection Suppress printing of any blank pages included in the document. p. 3-30
Multi-part Paper Configure this item when printing multiple types of paper such as with a p. 3-30
Printing carbon-copying form or slip.
Version You can view the printer driver version. p. 3-30
Add to Favorites Register the current settings in the Favorites tab. p. 3-30
[Environment] Tab
Via Shared Printer Select this option to share the printer driver of the print server to use this p. 3-31
machine.
SNMP Community Specify the community name for SNMP communication. p. 3-31
Name
Wake On LAN Specify whether to send a Wake On LAN signal when sending a print job. p. 3-31
Printer Configuration Manually specify the information of the optional configuration to the printer p. 3-32
driver.
Custom Paper Entry Register paper of a size of your choice to the printer driver. p. 3-32
Folder Entry Register the destination folder of printing data to the printer driver. p. 3-34
Get Printer Info Obtain the information of the optional configuration and automatically p. 3-34
configure this to the printer driver.

List of Print Mode Function Buttons

The function buttons available in Print mode are listed below.

Setting item Use this item to: See

View Selection Select whether to view items as thumbnails or as a list. p. 3-35
Online/Offline Switch the network connection. p. 3-35
Select All Select all of the pending documents that are displayed. p. 3-35

3-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Printer Driver Settings

This section describes how to configure the basic

settings of the printer driver, such as for color Duplex / Simplex
mode, duplex/simplex printing, and paper type.
Specify the sides of the paper that are printed on.

[Simplex]
[Basic] Tab Data is printed on one side of the paper.
[Duplex (Long Edge)]
Data is printed on both sides of the paper with the long
edge as the binding position.

[Duplex (Short Edge)]

Data is printed on both sides of the paper with the short
edge as the binding position.

Color Mode
Select a color mode.

[Auto]
The machine automatically reads the color of the
document and prints in full color (cyan, magenta, yellow,
gray, and black) or black accordingly.
[Full Color]
Select this option to print using five colors (cyan, • To print on both sides of the paper with mixed-
magenta, yellow, gray, and black). size documents, specify the binding orientation
[Black] in the [Mixed Size Original] dialog box.
Select this option to print in one color (black) regardless
of the colors used in the document.
[Cyan]
Select this option to print in one color (cyan) regardless
of the colors used in the document.
[Magenta]
Select this option to print in one color (magenta)
regardless of the colors used in the document.

3-9

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

Copies Original Size

Enter the number of copies (1 to 9999) to print. Specify the paper size and orientation of the
document data.
• When program has been configured, you
cannot enter the number of copies. [Orientation]
[Portrait], [Landscape]

• When printing on envelopes, it is recommended

Print and Pause that you connect the optional stacking tray and
envelope feed kit.
When printing a document with a large number of • The list shows the sizes registered in [Custom
pages or sheets, a page or a set is printed (this Paper Entry] in the [Environment] tab. (p. 3-32
page or set is not included in the number of pages "Custom Paper Entry")
specified) for you to check before starting the actual
printing. After you check the printout, press the
[Start] key on the printer to continue printing. Select ■ Specifying a Custom Size
the check box to enable this option. When the document is a non-standard size, select
[Custom].
• A printout of your check is output according to
the printing method ([Uncollated] or [Collated])
which is selected under [Sort].
1 Select [Custom] for [Original Size].
The [Custom] dialog box is displayed.
• After checking the printout, you can change the
settings on the operation panel of the printer.
(p. 3-3 "Changing Settings During Printing")
2 Enter the document size.
Sort
3 Click [OK].
• The size entered here is only valid when
Specify the paper output method when printing configuring the document size. Registering
multiple copies. frequently-used document sizes can be
useful. (p. 3-32 "Custom Paper Entry")
[Collated], [Uncollated]

• If [Collated] is selected, remove the check mark

from [Collate] in the Print dialog box of the
application. Documents may not be properly
printed if this check box is selected.

3-10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

Mixed Size Original Zoom

Use this option when multiple different original Specify the enlarge/reduce ratio of the original.
sizes are used in the original data.
Select the [Zoom] check box and enter the enlarge/
Select this check box to enable automatic selection
reduce ratio in the range of 50% to 200%.
of the paper tray that suits the document size.
If you do not select [Zoom], the enlarge/reduce ratio is
automatically selected based on the [Original Size],
• You cannot use the [Mixed Size Original] option
with the [Paper Size], [Combine], [Image [Paper Size] and page imposition settings.
Repeat], [Booklet], [Binding Edge], [Add Cover],
[Blank Page Detection], or [Multi-part Paper
Printing] function. (p. 3-11 "Paper Size", p. 3-15
Paper Size
"Combine", p. 3-16 "Image Repeat", p. 3-16
"Booklet", p. 3-20 "Binding Edge", p. 3-23 "Add
Specify the size of paper for printing.
Cover", p. 3-30 "Blank Page Detection", p. 3-30
"Multi-part Paper Printing")
• You cannot use [Paper Size] and [Mixed Size
• When using this function with duplex printing, Original] at the same time. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size
duplex printing is only applied when the size of Original") 3
the front and back of the document is the same.
(If the size is not the same, the back of the page • When printing on envelopes, it is recommended
is left blank.) that you connect the optional stacking tray and
envelope feed kit.
• When printing the mixed-size document data
without selecting the [Mixed Size Original] • The list shows the sizes registered in [Custom
check box, all pages are printed in the size of Paper Entry] in the [Environment] tab. (p. 3-32
the first page. "Custom Paper Entry")

■ Using This Function with Duplex ■ Specifying a Custom Paper Size

Printing When the paper is a non-standard size, select [Custom].

When using this function with duplex printing, you can set
the binding position for each paper size.
Select the [Mixed Size Original] check box and click
1 Select [Custom] for [Paper Size].
The [Custom] dialog box is displayed.
[Details] to display the [Mixed Size Original] dialog box.
Select the binding position for each size.

[Larger Page]
2 Enter the size of the paper.
[Long Edge], [Short Edge]
[Smaller Page]
3 Click [OK].
[Long Edge], [Short Edge]
[Rotate Larger Page 180 Degrees] • The size entered here is only valid when
configuring the document size. Registering
Select the [Rotate Larger Page 180 Degrees] check box
frequently-used paper sizes can be useful.
to rotate the larger pages 180 degrees.
(p. 3-32 "Custom Paper Entry")

• [Larger Page] means A3, B4 (Ledger, Legal),

and Tabloid; [Smaller Page] means other sizes.

• Some applications do not allow you to rotate the

larger pages to the desired orientation. In this
case, select the check box to rotate the print
orientation 180 degrees.

3-11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

• The machine selects the color profile that is

Paper Tray
most suitable for your paper type. To print with
the appropriate color balance, match the printer
Specify the input tray to use for printing.
paper settings with the loaded paper.

• When you use the [Multi-part Paper Printing] • If [Any] is selected, the paper type and image
function, [Paper Tray] is set to [Auto]. (p. 3-30 processing may not be compatible when
"Multi-part Paper Printing") communication with the printer is not
established or the printer's paper settings are
changed after sending a print job.
[Auto]
The paper tray is selected automatically according to the
What is the Color Profile?
[Paper Type] and [Paper Size] settings.
Colors on a monitor or other display are expressed in
[Feed Tray 1], [Feed Tray 2], [Feed Tray 3]
terms of the three primary colors of light (RGB: red,
The paper loaded in the specified tray is used for printing.
green, and blue), while colors printed with ink are
[Standard Tray]
expressed in terms of the three primary colors (CMY:
The paper loaded in the standard tray is used for printing. cyan, magenta, and yellow).
Because CMY, which is used to express the colors
• If [Auto] is selected, but the actual paper loaded printed on paper, has fewer colors than RGB, which is
in the tray does not match the [Paper Size] and
used to express colors displayed on a computer
[Paper Type] settings (or the same paper is
monitor, the printer cannot print the colors exactly as
loaded but the tray selection setting is not set to
seen on the monitor. For this reason, it is necessary to
[Auto Selection]), an error occurs and the job is
not printed. Select [Any] in [Paper Type]. use a special method to convert RGB colors to CMY
(p. 3-12 "Paper Type") colors so as to reproduce nearly the same colors or
natural colors.
• You can use the RISO Console to confirm the This method is called "color management", and the
paper size and paper type loaded in the printer
conversion table is called a "color profile".
paper tray. See "[Consumables] Screen"
With color management, the printer automatically
(p. 6-6) in "RISO Console".
selects several types of color profiles to obtain the
• When using the optional high capacity feeder, optimal color according to the combination of the
[High Capacity Feeder] is displayed in place of original image and paper being used.
[Standard Tray]. • This machine uses color profiles created and edited
based on the ColorSet technology licensed from
Monotype Imaging K.K.

Paper Type
Select the type of printing paper.
You can print the document data with adjustments,
such as coloration and amount of ink, as well as
image processing to suit the selected paper type.

[Any]
Select this option to enable automatic selection of paper
type according to printer settings.
[Plain]
[IJ Paper], [Matt Coated]
Select one of these when using IJ paper or similar paper.
[High-quality]
[Card-IJ]
This item can be configured when selecting [Standard
Tray] or [High Capacity Feeder] with [Paper Tray].

3-12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

• The data saved in a folder on this machine can

Output and Destination
be printed from the [Storage] - [Load] screen
(p. 4-4), or from "[Storage] Menu" (p. 6-11) on
Specify whether to print the data sent from a
"RISO Console".
computer or save it to a folder on the printer.
You can also save the data to a USB flash drive as • The data saved on a USB flash drive can be
a PRN file, or create a file to use in the Barcode printed from the [USB] - [Load] screen by
Area Definition Software. connecting the USB flash drive to the machine.
You can also save the data to this machine by
[Print] copying it to a folder on the machine. (p. 5-9
Prints the data. "Copy to Folder")
[Storage] • PRN files are output by the printer driver in a
You can save the document data to a folder on the format that was developed exclusively for RISO
machine as a PRN file. KAGAKU CORPORATION. PRN files cannot be
[Print & Storage] opened using printers or applications by other
Saves the original data in a folder on the machine and manufacturers.
prints it. • The computer user name is added, as the
[Save to USB Drive] owner, to the data saved to a folder on the
machine.
3
You can save the document data to a USB flash drive as
a PRN file. Even if you do not have a network
environment, you can print by connecting a USB flash
drive to the machine. ■ Destination Folder Settings
[Save as a File] The folders registered in [Folder Entry] on the
A PRN file is created to be used in the Barcode Area [Environment] tab are displayed in [Destination]. (p. 3-31
Definition Software. "[Environment] Tab")

• Do not remove the USB flash drive until saving

is finished. During data saving, a printer icon 1 In[Storage],
[Output], select [Print & Storage],
or [Save to USB Drive].
appears in the taskbar shown on the computer.
When saving is completed, the printer icon
disappears. Make sure that the icon has
disappeared before removing the USB flash 2 Click [Details].
The [Output] dialog box is displayed.
drive.

3 Inselect
the [Destination] pull-down menu,
the directory of the original
data.
• The available folders are displayed in the
[Destination] list.

4 Click [OK].
The selected folder name is displayed in the
[Destination] field.

3-13

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

Add to Favorites [Favorites] Tab

The current settings on the printer driver screen
can be saved to retrieve later as needed.
Up to 30 groups of settings can be saved.

1 Configure the necessary settings on

the printer driver screen.

2 Click [Add to Favorites].

The [Add to Favorites] dialog box is displayed.

3 Enter a name.
• Enter a name with 1 to 20 characters.

4 Click [Entry].
The settings are saved and displayed in the
[Favorites] tab.

List
The printer driver settings registered as favorites
are displayed in a list. The recommended settings
are pre-registered as favorites.
Click a favorite to display the details of the selected
favorite settings in a list. The print settings are
changed according to the selected favorite settings.

Edit Favorites
Edit the registered favorites.

[Current Setting]
The selected favorite settings are displayed.
[List]
The registered favorites are displayed.
[Up], [Down]
You can change the display order for the favorites in
[List] using these keys.
[Rename]
You can change the registered name of a favorite. Enter
a new name with 1 to 20 characters.
[Delete]
You can delete a favorite.

3-14

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

Open File [Layout] Tab

You can call and use printer driver settings saved in
a computer.

1 Click [Open File].

The [Open] dialog box is displayed.

2 Select a file on the computer.

3 Click [Open].
The loaded settings are displayed in [List].

Save in File 3
You can save the settings that are registered as a
favorite to a computer.
It is useful to save settings to a computer when, for
example, you want to share the settings among
multiple users or reinstall the printer driver. Combine
This function imposes continuous pages onto one
1 Select the settings in [List] that you
want to save to a computer.
sheet for printing.

• You cannot use the [Combine] function with the

2 Click [Save in File].

The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.
[Mixed Size Original], [Image Repeat], [Booklet],
or [Blank Page Detection] function. (p. 3-11
"Mixed Size Original", p. 3-16 "Image Repeat",
p. 3-16 "Booklet", p. 3-30 "Blank Page

3 Specify the destination folder and

file name.
Detection")

[OFF], [2 Pages: Left to Right], [2 Pages: Right to

Left], [2 Pages: Top to Bottom], [2 Pages: Bottom to

4 Click [Save].
The selected settings are saved.
Top], [4 Pages: Left Top to Bottom], [4 Pages: Left
Top to Right], [4 Pages: Right Top to Bottom], [4
Pages: Right Top to Left], [8 Pages: Left Top to
Bottom], [8 Pages: Left Top to Right], [8 Pages: Right
Top to Bottom], [8 Pages: Right Top to Left]
Add to Favorites Select the number of pages per sheet and the order in
which they are laid out.
The current settings on the printer driver screen
can be saved to retrieve later as needed. Up to 30
groups of settings can be saved.
For more information, see "Add to Favorites"
(p. 3-14).

3-15

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

Example: If [4 Pages: Left Top to Bottom] is selected

Booklet
Continuous multiple pages are imposed and printed
to create a middle-binding booklet after duplex
printing.

• You cannot use the [Booklet] function with the

[Mixed Size Original], [Combine], [Image
Repeat], [Binding Edge], or [Blank Page
Detection] function. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size
Original", p. 3-15 "Combine", p. 3-16 "Image
Repeat", p. 3-20 "Binding Edge", p. 3-30 "Blank
Page Detection")

• When using the multifunction finisher, you can

configure [Booklet Binding] (fold/center binding
with staple) in the [Finishing] tab.
Image Repeat For more information, see "Booklet Binding"
(p. 8-32) in "Optional Equipment".
The same page is printed multiple times on one
sheet.
[OFF], [Left to Right], [Right to Left], [Top/Bottom]
• You cannot use the [Image Repeat] function Specify the layout order. The [Left to Right] and [Right to
with [Mixed Size Original], [Combine], or Left] options appear when [Portrait] is selected for
[Booklet] function. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size [Original Size]. The [Top/Bottom] option appears when
Original", p. 3-15 "Combine", p. 3-16 "Booklet") [Landscape] is selected for [Orientation] under [Original
Size].
[OFF], [2 Pages], [4 Pages], [8 Pages]
Select the number of pages per sheet.

Example: If [4 Pages] is selected

3-16

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

Watermark
Add a watermark of the desired size and in the
desired position on printouts.

Select the [Watermark] check box and click [Details] to

display the [Watermark] dialog box. Select a character
string from the character string list and configure the
necessary settings.
The selected settings are immediately applied to the
preview image.

■ Text
[Select Text]
[Confidential], [Important], [Circulation],
[Reference], [Urgent], [Copying Prohibited]
[Add]
3
You can also add a character string of up to 63
characters long.
Click [Add] under the character string list, and enter the
Left to Right character string in the [Add] dialog box.
[Delete]
Select the character string to delete from the list, and
click [Delete].
You cannot delete the default character strings
(Confidential, Important, Circulation, etc.).
[Input Text]
[Apply]
You can also print a character string of up to 63
characters long. However, this cannot be registered with
the list of character strings. You will need to enter the
string of characters each time. Click [Apply] to apply the
entered character string to the preview image.

• You need to have administrative authority for

your computer to add or delete a watermark
character string.

■ Preview
The image according to the settings is displayed. You
can also use the mouse pointer to adjust the position in
the preview image.

3-17

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

■ Apply Page
Stamp
[All Pages], [First Page]
Stamp the page number, date, or text in the header
or footer.
■ Text Decoration
[Font] Select the [Stamp] check box and click [Details] to
Select a font and style. display the [Stamp] dialog box. Use the tab screens to
configure the settings.
[Size]
[Page], [Date], [Text]
Specify the character string size.
[Color]
• You cannot print different types of stamps in the
Specify the color of the character string. Click [Others] to
same position.
select a color from the color palette of the operating
system. • When using this function with [Combine] or
[Transparency] [Image Repeat], the page number and date are
stamped on each page of the copy paper, not
Specify the transparency of the character string. A higher
per page of the original document. When using
transparency means that the print data will be more
this function with [Booklet], the page number
visible in the background of the watermark character and date are stamped on each booklet page.
string.
[Frame]
[Not Installed], [Circle], [Rectangle], [Double ■ Page
Rectangle]
To print the page stamp, select [ON] on the [Page] tab
Select a frame for the watermark.
screen.
[Top Left], [Top Center], [Top Right], [Bottom Left],
■ Print Position [Bottom Center], [Bottom Right]
Select the page stamping position.
[Text Angle]
[Transparency]
[Horizontal (0 deg)], [Vertical (90 deg)], [Vertical
Select the [Transparency] check box to have the date
(270 deg)], [Oblique (45 deg)], [Oblique (315 deg)],
stamped on top when the stamp area and images
[Custom] (0-360 deg)
overlap.
Select the angle of the text. You can also enter the
Remove the check mark to create a white space by
numerical angle of the text.
removing images in the stamp area, and then stamp the
[Print Position]
date in that white space.
[Center], [Top Left], [Top Center], [Top Right],
[Start Number]
[Center Right], [Bottom Right], [Bottom Center],
Enter the first number for the page stamp.
[Bottom Left], [Center Left], [Custom]
[Stamp Start Page]
Select the print position of the watermark. You can also
Enter which page to start the page stamps. To print no
enter the values for the positions in the vertical and
page stamp on the cover, set [Stamp Start Page] to "2"
horizontal directions.
(For duplex printing, set this to "3" depending on the
case).
[Font]
Select a font and style.
[Size]
Specify the size of the text for the page stamp.

3-18

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

■ Date [Font]
Select a font and style.
To print the date stamp, select [ON] on the [Date] tab
[Size]
screen.
Specify the size of the text for the text stamp.
[Top Left], [Top Center], [Top Right], [Bottom Left],
[Bottom Center], [Bottom Right]
Select the date stamping position.
[Transparency] Image Position
Select the [Transparency] check box to have the date
stamped on top when the stamp area and images
Adjust the printing position of images.
overlap.
• You can move the image position up to 20 mm
Remove the check mark to create a white space by
(13/16") in all directions (up, down, left, right).
removing images in the stamp area, and then stamp the
date in that white space. • When performing duplex printing, the front and
[Apply Page] back sides can be adjusted separately.
Specify the first page on which to print the date stamp.
[All Pages]: The date will be printed on all pages. Select the [Image Position] check box and click [Details]
[First Page]: The date will be printed on the first page to display the [Image Position] dialog box. 3
only. Enter a value in the data entry field of the direction that
[Stamp Date] you want to adjust.
Configure the date to use for the date stamp. [Front Side], [Back Side]
[Today]: The date set on the computer is printed. Enter a value for [Horizontal] or [Vertical].
[Specify Date]: The date specified in the text box is [Reset]
printed. All values are reset to zero.
[Font]
Select a font and style.
[Size]
Specify the size of the text for the date stamp.

■ Text
To print a text stamp, select [ON] on the [Text] tab
screen.
[Top Left], [Top Center], [Top Right], [Bottom Left],
[Bottom Center], [Bottom Right]
Select the text stamping position.
[Transparency]
Select the [Transparency] check box to have the date
stamped on top when the stamp area and images
overlap.
Remove the check mark to create a white space by
removing images in the stamp area, and then stamp the
date in that white space.
[Apply Page]
Specify the pages on which to print the text stamp.
[All Pages]: The text will be printed on all pages.
[First Page]: The text will be printed on the first page only.
[Text]
The text specified in the text box is printed.

3-19

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

Rotation [Finishing] Tab

Specify the print orientation.

[Auto], [0 deg], [90 deg], [180 deg], [270 deg]

When [Auto] is selected, the print orientation is set

automatically according to the orientation of the
document data and the orientation of the paper loaded in
the paper tray. For normal use, select [Auto].
Binding Edge
• To align the print orientation with an envelope or
other paper with a fixed feeding direction, Specify the binding margin.
specify the angle of rotation.
• You cannot use the [Binding Edge] function with
• [Auto] may be the only option available
the [Mixed Size Original] or [Booklet] function.
depending on the document size, the size and
(p. 3-11 "Mixed Size Original", p. 3-16
orientation of the paper loaded in the tray, and
"Booklet")
other settings.

[Left], [Right], [Top]

Add to Favorites
The current settings on the printer driver screen
can be saved to retrieve later as needed. Up to 30
groups of settings can be saved.
For more information, see "Add to Favorites"
(p. 3-14).

3-20

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

■ Binding Margin Settings

Punch
Select the binding edge and click [Details] to display the
[Binding Edge] dialog box. When using the optional multifunction finisher, you
Specify the margin width. can configure holes to punch.
Select the [Auto Reduction] check box to automatically For more information, see "Punch" (p. 8-30) in
reduce the printed image to fit the paper in cases where "Optional Equipment".
the margin width does not allow for the original-scale
printed image to fit into the paper.

Fold
Without a margin With a margin
When using the optional multifunction finisher, you
Paper
can configure how the paper is folded.
For more information, see "Fold" (p. 8-30) in
"Optional Equipment".

Binding
margin
Print surface
Print surface is Booklet Binding 3
automatically
reduced. When using the optional multifunction finisher, you
can configure the binding method.
For more information, see "Booklet Binding"
(p. 8-32) in "Optional Equipment".

Binding margin

Offset Output
If you are using the optional face down finisher,
Staple high capacity stacker, or multifunction finisher, you
If you are using the optional face down finisher or can configure how the output position is offset.
multifunction finisher, the staple function is For more information, see the following:
available at the specified position. • When using the face down finisher (p. 8-6 "Offset
For more information, see the following: Output")
• When using the face down finisher (p. 8-4 • When using the high capacity stacker (p. 8-23
"Staple") "Offset Output")
• When using the multifunction finisher (p. 8-28 • When using the multifunction finisher (p. 8-34
"Staple") "Offset Output")

3-21

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

■ Number on Slip Sheet

Slip Sheet
The text is printed at the bottom (within approx. 5 mm
Use this function to insert a slip sheet between print (7/32") of the edge) or top (within approx. 5 mm (7/32") of
units when printing multiple copies. You can stamp the edge) of the sheet.
a number or letter on slip sheets.

[OFF] Output
orientation
Slip sheets are not inserted.
[Between Sorts]
or
A slip sheet is inserted between sets, based on the unit
specified in [Sort].
[Between Jobs] Regular-sized paper, Irregular-sized
A slip sheet is inserted between print jobs. irregular-sized paper paper which has not
specified in [Custom been registered to
Select whether to insert a slip sheet between sorts or Paper Entry] the printer driver
between jobs, and click [Details] to display the [Slip
Sheet] dialog box. [OFF]
Select the tray for slip sheets and specify the text to Nothing is stamped.
stamp. [1 2 3 ...]
Numbers are stamped on slip sheets in numerical order
(1, 2, 3...). (Up to 9999)
■ Slip Sheet Tray
[A B C ...]
[Standard Tray], [Feed Tray 1], [Feed Tray 2], Letters are stamped on slip sheets in alphabetical order
[Feed Tray 3]
(A, B, C...Z, AA, AB, AC...). (Up to ZZZ)

• When using the optional high capacity feeder,

[High Capacity Feeder] is displayed in place of
[Standard Tray].

3-22

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

Add Cover Output Tray Relay

Specify this option to add a front and/or back cover. When using the auto-control stacking tray, high
Paper is added from a specified tray before or after capacity stacker, or multifunction finisher, the
the data to be printed. Specify this option to use output tray switches automatically when the tray
colored paper or paper that differs from the pages that is being used becomes full.
to be printed. For more information, see the following:
• When using the auto-control stacking tray
• You cannot use [Add Cover] and [Mixed Size (p. 8-16 "Output Tray Relay")
Original] at the same time. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size • When using the high capacity stacker (p. 8-24
Original") "Output Tray Relay")
• When using the multifunction finisher (p. 8-35
Select the [Add Cover] check box and click [Details] to "Output Tray Relay")
display the [Add Cover] dialog box. Select [Add Front
Cover] or [Add Back Cover], or both check boxes, and
specify the tray for the selected cover. Mail Making
[Add Front Cover] 3
This option inserts a cover sheet before the first page. When using the optional Wrapping Envelope
[Add Back Cover] Finisher, you can create enveloped documents with
This option inserts a cover sheet after the last page.
mail form paper and printed materials.
For more information, see the user's guide for the
[Select Front Cover Tray], [Select Back Cover Tray]
Wrapping Envelope Finisher.
[Standard Tray], [Feed Tray 1], [Feed Tray 2],
[Feed Tray 3]

• Specify the trays loaded with paper to be used Perfect Binding

for the covers.
When using the optional Perfect Binder, you can
• When loading preprinted paper, it is configure the setting for creating booklets with
recommended that one set be printed to check
perfect binding.
that the orientation matches that of the other
For more information, see the user's guide for the
pages to be printed.
Perfect Binder.
• When using the optional high capacity feeder,
with [Select Front Cover Tray] and [Select Back
Cover Tray], [High Capacity Feeder] is
displayed in place of [Standard Tray]. Add to Favorites
The current settings on the printer driver screen
can be saved to retrieve later as needed. Up to 30
Output Tray groups of settings can be saved.
For more information, see "Add to Favorites"
If you are using the optional stacking tray or (p. 3-14).
multifunction finisher, you can select the trays for
output.
For more information, see the following:
• When using the auto-control stacking tray / wide
stacking tray (p. 8-16 "Output Tray")
• When using the high capacity stacker (p. 8-23
"Output Tray")
• When using the multifunction finisher (p. 8-35
"Output Tray")

3-23

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

[Image] Tab Image Quality

Specify the image resolution.

[Standard]
Suitable for documents and other originals with text.
[Fine]
This option is suitable for photos and similar originals.
[Draft]
This option reduces ink consumption during printing.
When less ink is used, print density is reduced and the
neutral colors become uneven.
[Data Compression]
Use this option to prioritize network communication
speed over quality. When file size of the print data
becomes smaller, neutral colors become uneven.
[High Chromogenic]
Use this option to print with vivid colors.
[CMY Print]
The printout is made without using black ink. This
improves the fixing property of the printout and prevents
Original Type ink from rubbing off onto other materials.

Select whether to give priority to the image quality • Printing will take longer if you select [Fine].
of photos or text in originals.
• [Envelope Imaging] cannot be configured when
[Photo-based] setting [Draft] or [Data Compression]. (p. 3-27
"Envelope Imaging")
This option processes image data with more natural
colors.
[Line-based]
This option processes text and illustrations with sharp Line Smoothing
rendering.
This function supplements the intermediate colors
• When the [Color mode] is [Black] [Cyan], or of drawing and background colors in outline
[Magenta], [Photo-based] will be selected. It is sections of text or illustrations (line drawing) to
not possible to change this setting. make the outlines smoother.
You can select either of two different image
processing types.

Print Density [OFF]

Select this option if you do not want to perform line
Specify the print density. smoothing.

[-3] (light), [-2], [-1], [±0 (Standard)], [+1], [+2], [+3] [Low]
(dark) Select this option to make outlines smoother.
This option is appropriate for printing the data that do not
need fine processing.
[High]
Select this option to make outlines smoother and make
fine characters and lines clearer.

3-24

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

[Dot Process (140 lpi)], [Dot Process (200 lpi)]

(When [Color Mode] is set to [Black])
[Dot Process (70 lpi)], [Dot Process (100 lpi)]
(When [Color Mode] is set to other than [Black])
This function expresses gradation by changing the size
of the dots. The larger the dots, the darker the gradation.
The smaller the dots, the lighter the gradation. A dot
process of 100 or 200 lines per inch provides more
detailed images.
(Image)

• The line smoothing function's image processing

is inversely proportional to processing speed
(print speed). The higher the image quality, the
lower the print speed.

Screening 3
70 lines per inch 100 lines per inch
Specify the halftone processing method. (Enlarged image)

Halftone is a processing method that varies the density

and size of ink dots printed on paper to give the
appearance of continuous color gradation when only
Gamma Correction
using a limited number of inks.
Use this function to adjust the lightness, chroma,
[Error Diffusion]
contrast, and gamma value of red, green, and blue.
This function expresses gradation by changing the
• [Gamma Correction] and [Blank Page
density of dots. The higher the density, the darker the
Detection] cannot be used together. (p. 3-30
gradation. The lower the density, the lighter the
"Blank Page Detection")
gradation.

Select the [Gamma Correction] check box and click

[Details] to display the [Gamma Correction] dialog box.
Enter a value between -25 and +25 for each item.

[Lightness]
The larger the value, the brighter (whitish) the color.
[Chroma]
The smaller the value, the more washed-out the color.
The larger the value, the more vivid the color.
[Contrast]
Adjusts the ratio of brightness to darkness.
The smaller the value, the lower the contrast. The larger
the value, the higher the contrast.
[Red], [Green], [Blue]
Corrects the gamma value of each color.
The smaller the value, the weaker the color. The larger
the value, the stronger the color.

3-25

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

• When printouts are yellowish, lower the values

■ Checking the Barcode Area
of red and green. To adjust other colors, consult Definition
with the administrator for configuration.
Select the [Barcode Area Proof] check box and click [OK]
to output a printout for checking. Check whether the
specified area is out of alignment. If the specified area is
Barcode Area Definition not printed in the desired position, use the Barcode Area
Definition Software again to re-configure the barcode
This setting adjusts the print density of the specified area.
barcode area so that it is suitable for reading.

[Barcode Area Definition]

Select the check box, and select an area definition file to Request for Toner
Collection
print from the pull-down menu.
[Details]
Click [Details] to display the [Barcode Area Definition]
dialog box.
[Density Correction]
You can adjust the print density of the specified barcode
area.
[-2] (light), [-1], [Standard]
Specified
[Barcode Area Proof] barcode
On printouts with shaded barcode areas, you can check RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION area
whether the barcode area definition is out of alignment, (shaded
and whether letters or illustrations overlap the 1 mm part)
Correct Specification
(3/64") margin around the barcode. ●Surround the barcode with a margin of 1 mm (3/64") or more.

• When [Barcode Area Definition] is specified,

OK
[Draft] and [CMY Print] in [Image Quality]
cannot be configured. (p. 3-24 "Image Quality")

●The specified area cannot be smaller than the barcode.

■ Creating a Barcode Area Definition
Wrong
File
To use the [Barcode Area Definition] function, use the
●The specified area must be aligned with the barcode.
Barcode Area Definition Software beforehand to create a
CSV file that specifies the barcode print area for Wrong
registering in the printer.
For more information on installing the Barcode Area ●Do not include another object with the barcode.
Definition Software, specifying the barcode area, and Any non-black image inside the specified area is printed out white
(disappears).
registereing the definition file in the printer, see "Using
the Barcode Area Definition Software" (p. 7-1). Wrong

3-26

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

• With [Barcode Area Proof], the barcode in the

■ How to Register to the Default
specified area is printed with magenta when the
[Color mode] is [Full Color] or with the
configured color when a different color mode is 1 Right-click the GD series printer
from [Devices and Printers] on the
selected.
[Start] menu.
• The type of targeted barcodes is one-
dimensional. If the barcodes are two-
dimensional (e.g., QR code), you do not need to
perform this setting. 2 Open the printer driver screen from
[Printing Preferences] to display the
• If you print using different resolutions for the [Image] tab screen.
application that created the original and the
printer, barcodes may not be able to be read
correctly even using this function.
3 Configure the settings necessary for
barcode printing, and click [Apply].
The "barcode area definition" file is registered as the
■ Barcode printing barcode originals default settings. From now on, you can perform
barcode printing just by selecting the printer driver.
Once the barcode area is correctly defined, print the
document.
3

• In the area specified as the barcode area, Envelope Imaging

regardless of the color of the original, the base
color is white, and the barcode color is black. Prevent blur and small stains during envelope
printing. Select the [Envelope Imaging] check box.

1 Open the printer driver from the

Print menu on the document • [Envelope Imaging] cannot be configured when
setting [Draft] or [Data Compression] is set for
application screen. [Image Quality]. (p. 3-24 "Image Quality")

2 On the [Image] tab screen, select the

[Barcode Area Definition] check Thin line Enhance
box.
Prevent fine lines in the original from disappearing.
Select the [Thin line Enhance] check box.
3 Select the barcode area definition
file from the pull-down menu.
Add to Favorites
4 Click [OK].
The print density of the barcode area is appropriately
The current settings on the printer driver screen
can be saved to retrieve later as needed. Up to 30
configured before printing.
groups of settings can be saved.
For more information, see "Add to Favorites"
• Set the settings of frequently used barcode
originals as the default settings. This will enable
(p. 3-14).
you to print barcodes without performing
necessary settings each time, making barcode
printing easy.

3-27

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

[Advanced] Tab PIN Code

You can set a PIN code when printing a document
you do not want others to view.
A PIN code-protected job will not be printed unless
you enter the PIN code using the operation panel
on the printer.
Select the [PIN Code] check box and enter a PIN code.
When [Hide Job Name] is selected, the job name is
displayed as "*****" on the operation panel of the printer
and on the RISO Console.

• Manage the PIN code so as not to forget it.

Users without administrative authority cannot
delete jobs from a list for which the PIN code is
unknown. Contact the administrator to delete
these jobs.

Job Comment
You can enter a comment for printer users. You
Owner can display job comments using the operation
panel of the printer or the RISO Console.
You can enter an owner's name of your choice.
Select the [Owner] check box to enter the owner's
name.
Program
This option is convenient when the number of
Job Name required copies varies by group (such as corporate
division or classes).
You can enter a job name of your choice. Select the
You can program settings for the number of copies
[Job Name] check box to enter the job name.
and sets, sorting, slip sheets, and other options for
each group. This enables you to quickly print
exactly the number of copies of the number of sets
you need.
You can configure up to 60 groups for the
programs.

Select the [Program] check box and click [Details] to

display the [Program] dialog box. Specify the number of
copies and sets for each group.

• [Program] and [Multi-part Paper Printing] cannot

be used at the same time. (p. 3-30 "Multi-part
Paper Printing")

3-28

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

■ Entering the Number of Copies and ■ Slip Sheet Tray

Sets [Feed Tray 1], [Feed Tray 2], [Feed Tray 3], [Standard
You can specify up to 9,999 copies and 99 sets per Tray]
group.
For example, to distribute a document to four divisions in
■ Number on Slip Sheet
an office, you can use [Program] to print the required
number of sheets per division with a single operation. When this check box is selected, numbers are stamped
on the slip sheets.
Division General General Accounting Management If [Between Sets] is selected, the group number and set
Affairs 1 Affairs 2
number are stamped.
No. of 10 6 24 6 If [Between Groups] is selected, the group number is
employees
stamped.
To print the leaflets by group, configure the settings as
follows.
■ Offset Output (Program)
Division General General Accounting Management If you are using the optional face down finisher, high
Affairs 1 Affairs 2 capacity stacker, or multifunction finisher, you can 3
Copies × Sets 10 × 1 6×1 24 × 1 6×1 configure this item. For more information, see the
following:
Even if two divisions have the same number of
• When using the face down finisher
employees (such as General Affairs 2 and Management),
(p. 8-6 "Offset Output (Program)")
you can configure the settings as follows to print the
• When using the high capacity stacker
required number of sheets per division.
(p. 8-24 "Offset Output (Program)")
Group 01G 02G 03G • When using the multifunction finisher
(General (General (Accounting) (p. 8-35 "Offset Output (Program)")
Affairs 1) Affairs 2 and
Management)
Copies × Sets 10 × 1 6×2 24 × 1

In this case, specifying [Between Sets] for [Slip Sheet

(Program)] will make it easier to separate the bundles for
each department.

■ Sort
Specify whether to print page by page or in sets.
[Uncollated], [Collated]

■ Slip Sheet (Program)

Insert a slip sheet to separate printouts into specified
units.
[OFF]
Slip sheets are not inserted.
[Between Sets]
Slip sheets are inserted between sets.
[Between Groups]
Slip sheets are inserted between groups.

3-29

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

Slow Printing Version

You can slow down the printing speed. This also Check the version and color profile of the printer
reduces the amount of noise produced by the driver, as well as the model name of the printer.
machine when printing jobs.

Add to Favorites
Blank Page Detection
The current settings on the printer driver screen
The print data is printed excluding the blank pages. can be saved to retrieve later as needed. Up to 30
groups of settings can be saved.
• "Blank pages" means pages that are normally For more information, see "Add to Favorites"
output without anything printed on them. Pages (p. 3-14).
are printed even if they have only a header or
footer but no main text.

• You cannot use the [Blank Page Detection]

function with the [Mixed Size Original],
[Combine], [Booklet], or [Gamma Correction]
function. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size Original", p. 3-15
"Combine", p. 3-16 "Booklet", p. 3-25 "Gamma
Correction")

Multi-part Paper Printing

Configure this item when printing multiple types of
paper such as with a carbon-copying form or slip.
Select the [Multi-part Paper Printing] check box and click
[Details] button to display the [Multi-part Paper Printing]
dialog box.

Under [Feed Trays], select the tray to use and add this to
the [Feed Tray Order] list. As printouts are made by
feeding paper in order from the tray at the top of the
[Feed Tray Order] list with the [Multi-part Paper Printing]
function, use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the
order of the paper trays in the priority list.

• You cannot use the [Multi-part Paper Printing]

function with the [Mixed Size Original] or
[Program] function at the same time. (p. 3-11
"Mixed Size Original", p. 3-28 "Program")

• When [Multi-part Paper Printing] is selected,

[Paper Tray] is set to [Auto]. (p. 3-12 "Paper
Tray")

• If you are using the optional face down finisher

or multifunction finisher and have configured
[Staple]/[Punch], the [Multi-part Paper Printing]
function will not be possible unless the size and
direction of the paper is the same in all trays
specified with [Feed Tray Order].

3-30

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

[Environment] Tab SNMP Community Name

Specify the community name for SNMP
When using the printer driver for the first time or
communication.
adding optional equipment to the machine, you
Place a check in [SNMP Community Name] and use the
must configure the environment settings on the
text box to enter 1 to 32 characters as the community
[Environment] tab under printer properties.
name for SNMP communication.
To display the [Environment] tab, go to [Devices and
Printers] from the [Start] menu, right-click the GD series
• If a check is not placed in [SNMP Community
printer, and open the [Printer Properties].
Name], the community name for SNMP
communication will be set to "public".

• Alphanumeric characters (upper case/lower

case) and the following symbols can be entered
in the text box for [SNMP Community Name]:
,./:;@[\]^_

• It will not be possible to obtain information from

the machine if the SNMP community names are 3
different between the machine and the printer
driver. If you have made changes to the SNMP
community name with the machine, you must
make sure to also apply the change to the
printer driver.

Wake On LAN
You can send a Wake On LAN signal from the
computer to start the printer.
• Clicking [Restore Default] restores all settings Select the check box for [Wake on LAN] and enter the
on the tab to their default values. machine's MAC address in the [MAC address of the
Printer] field.
When a check is placed in [Connect to Another Network],
Via Shared Printer the Wake On LAN signal can be sent even when the
machine is located in a different network segment than
Select this option to share the printer driver of the the computer.
server computer to use this machine.
Place a check in [Via Shared Printer] and under [IP • Select [Get Printer Info] and click [Apply] to
Address of the Printer], enter the IP address of this automatically obtain the MAC address of the
machine configured to be shared with the print server by printer and display it in [MAC Address of the
using up to 39 characters. You can check the IP address Printer]. Manually re-enter the address if the
of the machine on the [System Info] - [Machine Info] displayed MAC address is not the MAC address
of the desired printer.
screen on the operation panel.
• Normally, leave the check box for [Connect to
Another Network] unselected.

• Despite configuring [Wake on LAN], depending

on the network settings it may not be possible to
start the printer. Contact your network
administrator for details.

3-31

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

• The machine changes the color profile

Printer Configuration
according to the paper type. (p. 3-12 "Paper
Type")
Normally, you can click [Get Printer Info] to obtain
Even when the paper is not specified, in order to
the optional equipment configuration information
print with an appropriate color profile, it is
from the printer automatically. The information necessary to configure the type of paper with
obtained from the machine is displayed in [Printer [Default Paper Type of "Any"]. Make your
Configuration]. The obtained information can also selection based on the administrator's
be changed manually. recommendation.

• The information displayed on the screen varies

depending on the optional equipment
connected. Custom Paper Entry
Register up to 99 non-standard paper sizes.
■ Configuring the Printer Configuration The sizes registered here are displayed in [Original
Automatically Size] and [Paper Size].

Select [Get Printer Info] and click [Apply] to obtain the

optional equipment configuration information from the ■ Configuring the Paper Size
printer and display it in [Printer Configuration]. Automatically
You can use this option when the paper size is already
• [Unit of Length], [Default Paper Type of "Any"],
registered in the printer.
and [External System Link] are not configured
automatically.

1 Click [Custom Paper Entry].

The [Custom Paper Entry] dialog box is displayed.
■ Configuring the Printer Configuration
Manually
You can change the optional equipment configuration 2 Click [Get Printer Info].
The information of the paper size registered in the
that you obtain from the printer.
printer is displayed.
Specify the following settings manually:
[Paper Feeder]
Select the type of feeder that is connected to this
machine.
3 Click [Close].
The paper size information is saved.
[Finisher]
Select the type of finisher that is connected to this
machine.
[Face Down Finisher]
Select whether there is a face down finisher.
[Unit of Length]
Select whether to display the length in [mm] or [inch].
[Default Paper Type of "Any"]
Select the paper type to use when [Paper Type] under
the [Basic] tab on the printer driver screen is set to [Any].
[External System Link]
Set this option to [ON] to enable and [OFF] to disable
external system link.

3-32

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Printer Driver Settings

■ Configuring the Paper Size Manually

3 Click [Save in File].
1 Click [Custom Paper Entry].
The [Custom Paper Entry] dialog box is displayed.
4 Specify the destination folder and
file name.

2 Enter the paper width and length. 5 Click [Save].

The selected paper size is saved.

Width ■ Reading a Paper Size from a

Paper feed Computer
and output You can read and use a paper size saved to a
direction
Height computer.

When the multifunction finisher is connected, see

"Multifunction Finisher FG10 (Optional)" (p. 9-15) in 1 Click [Custom Paper Entry].
The [Custom Paper Entry] dialog box is displayed. 3
the "Appendix".

3 Enter a name for the paper size. 2 Click [Open File].

Enter a name with 1 to 30 characters.
3 Select the file with the paper size
setting on the computer.
4 Click
size.
[Add] to register the paper
When the computer is configured to display the file
extension, the file for the paper size will have an
extension of .udp displayed.

5 Click [Close].
The paper size information is saved.
4 Click [Open].
The read paper sizes are displayed in the list on the
[Custom Paper Entry] dialog box.
■ Saving the Paper Size to a Computer
You can save the registered paper size to a computer.
It is useful to save settings to a computer when, for ■ Deleting a Paper Size
example, you want to share the registered paper size
among multiple users or reinstall the printer driver.
1 Click [Custom Paper Entry].
The [Custom Paper Entry] dialog box is displayed.

1 Click [Custom Paper Entry].

The [Custom Paper Entry] dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the paper size to delete from
the list box.
2 Select the paper size to save from
the list box.
3 Click [Delete].
The selected paper size is deleted.

3-33

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

Folder Entry Get Printer Info

You can register in the printer driver the folders to Obtain the information of the optional configuration
save the print data to. The shared folders and of the printer and automatically configure this to the
personal folders registered here are displayed as printer driver.
print data destination folders in [Output] under the For more information, see "Printer Configuration"
[Basic] tab on the printer driver screen. (p. 3-13 (p. 3-32).
"Output and Destination")

• If folder information cannot be obtained from the

printer, the shared folders are displayed as
"Shared folder 1" to "Shared folder 30".

■ Configuring a Folder Entry

1 Click [Folder Entry].

The [Folder Entry] dialog box is displayed.

2 Click [Get Printer Info].

The information of shared folders registered in the
printer is displayed in [Shared Folder in the Printer].

3 Select the folder to add to

[Registered Folder] and click [Add
].

4 Configure the personal folder.

For personal folders, by selecting the [Use Personal
Folder] check box, personal folders will be displayed
under [Destination] on the [Basic] tab.
Click [OK].

5 Click [Apply].
6 Click [OK].

3-34

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Print Mode Function Buttons

Select All
Touch this to select all pending jobs.
Touch this again to cancel the selection.

Details
Select the job in [Waiting Job List] and touch
Function buttons
[Details] in the sub-menu. Click this button to view
the setting values for the selected job. 3
View Selection
Change Setting
You can select whether to view the waiting jobs as
thumbnails or as a list.
To check job settings, select the job and touch
[ ]: View as thumbnails [Change Setting] in the sub menu.
[ ]: View as list

Paper Selection
Online/Offline Select a paper tray.
You can also change the tray settings (paper size,
You can switch the network connection status paper type, double-feed check, and auto selection).
(online/offline). When this setting is set to [OFF], For more information, see "Paper Selection"
the machine does not accept print orders from (p. 1-8) in "Copying".
computers.
The [OFF] option should be used when using this
machine exclusively.
[OFF], [ON]

• When this setting is set to [OFF], [ ] is

displayed. (p. 15 "[Home1] Screen")

• If the user does not return [Online / Offline] to

[ON] after printing their job, the setting
automatically returns to [ON] in the following
cases:
- When auto reset is executed (The auto reset
timing is set by the administrator.)
- When you log out

3-35

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 3 Printing

Slow Printing External System Link

You can slow down the printing speed. This also
When using an external system link, you can print
reduces the amount of noise produced by the
jobs saved on an external system.
machine when printing jobs.
For more information, see "Slow Printing" (p. 1-29)
• Depending on the settings of the administrator,
in "Copying".
the [External System Link] button may be
displayed with a different name on the [Home1]
screen.
Print Density • The operating procedures may differ depending
on the external system being used. Contact
You can adjust the print density. your administrator for details.
For more information, see "Print Density" (p. 1-12)
in "Copying".
1 Touch [External System Link] on the
[Home1] screen.
Image Position When connected to an external system, a list of the
documents saved on the external system will be
Adjust the printing position of images. displayed.
For more information, see "Image Position"
(p. 1-22) in "Copying".
2 Select a document and press the
[Start] key.

Check Setting

1 Touch [Check Setting].

The [Check Setting] screen is displayed. Check the
current settings.
The following setting can be configured from the sub
menu:
• Setting Confirmation Print

2 Touch [Back].

3-36

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Storage

You can save the scanned data in folders for printing as necessary.

Overview of Storage Operations Overview of Storage Operations

(Save)..................................... p. 4-2 (Load).....................................p. 4-4

1. Load the original. 1. Select [Storage] - [Load] on the

[Home1] screen.

2. Select [Storage] - [Save] on the

[Home1] screen. 2. Select a folder.

3. Select a folder to save the data

3. Select a document.
to.

4. Enter the number of copies

4. Press the [Start] key.
using the numeric keys.

5. Press the [Start] key.

Storage Mode Function Buttons .......................... p. 4-8

This section explains the functions available in Storage mode.

4
ComColor GD Series User's Guide
 4 Storage
Storage

Overview of Storage Operations

This section explains the basic operations of the 2 Slide the original guides to match
storage mode. the width of the originals.

Saving the Data to a

Folder
You can save the scanned data to a folder.

● 1 Load the original.

For more information on the types of originals that ■ On the Platen Glass
can be used, see "Originals" in the "Safety
Information". 1 Open the original cover.

■ In the ADF 2 Load the original.

Load the original face down on the glass. Align
1 Load the original in the ADF. the corner of the original with the upper-left
corner of the glass.
Align the originals and place them face up.

3 Close the original cover.

• Open and close the original cover gently.

4-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Storage Operations

● 2 Select [Storage] - [Save] on ● 4 Touch [Save Document].

the [Home1] screen. Specify the detailed settings for saving the
document.
For more information on the functions that can be
configured, see "List of Settings in [Storage] -
[Save]" (p. 4-5).

● 5 Press the [Start] key.

● 3 Select a folder to save the

data to.
Documents Sub menu

Folders Sub menu

The list of folders shows the personal folder and the

shared folders for which use is allowed by the
administrator.
The following settings can be configured from the
sub menu:
• Change Color
• Rename

The list of documents shows the documents that

are saved in the selected folder.
The following settings can be configured from the
sub menu:
• Details
• Rename
• Delete

4-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 4 Storage

The list of documents shows the documents that

Printing a Document in a are saved in the selected folder.
The following settings can be configured from the
Folder sub menu:
• Details
You can print documents that are saved in a folder. • Change Setting
• Rename
• Delete
● 1 Select [Storage] - [Load] on • Copy to USB Drive
the [Home1] screen. • Copy to Folder

● 3 Enter the number of copies

using the numeric keys.

● 4 Press the [Start] key.

• Documents are saved in a folder in the form of
data that includes setting details. When printing
a document, be sure to do so with the same
paper type as that which was configured when
● 2 Select the folder you wish to the document was saved in the folder.

use and select the document

you wish to print.
Documents Sub menu

Folders Sub menu

The list of folders shows the personal folder and the

shared folders for which use is allowed by the
administrator.
The following settings can be configured from the
sub menu:
• Change Color
• Rename

4-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Storage Operations

List of Settings in [Storage] - [Save]

Select the folder on the [Storage] - [Save] screen, and touch [Save Document] to display the screen listing the
setting items. The settings that can be configured on this screen are listed below.

Reference
Setting item Use this item to:
Page
Document Name View the document name when saving the data in a folder. p. 4-9
Color Mode Select color or monochrome printing. p. 1-7
Reproduction Size Reduce or enlarge the copied image. p. 1-7
Paper Selection Change the paper tray, paper type, and feed control settings according to p. 1-8
the copying paper.
Scanning Size Specify the scanning size for originals. p. 1-10
Original Orientation Specify the orientation of the original. p. 1-10
Duplex / Simplex Specify the sides of the original to be scanned and the sides of the paper to p. 1-11
be printed on.
Sort Specify the printing method for making multiple copies of the original. p. 1-11
Scanning Level Adjust the scanning level. p. 1-12
Print Density Specify the print density. p. 1-12 4
ADF Scan & Pause Scan the original as one job even when having to load the original in multiple p. 1-12
sets due to the large number of pages in the original.
Mixed Size Original Scan the original containing pages of the different original sizes. p. 1-13
Book Shadow Remove shadows that appear in the center of images when an open book is p. 1-13
Erasure scanned.
Page Split Scan double-spread pages and split them into two parts (right and left). p. 1-14
Combine Impose continuous pages onto one sheet. p. 1-15
Image Repeat Impose multiple copies of the same original onto one sheet. p. 1-16
Booklet Specify the imposition setting when creating a booklet. You can also bi-fold p. 1-16
the pages and bind them in the center when the optional multifunction
finisher is connected.
PIN code Configure whether to set a PIN code for the job. p. 2-9
If a PIN code is configured, you will need to enter this PIN code when
printing or deleting a document.
Stamp Stamp the page number, date, or text in the header or footer. p. 1-17
Page Border Add a border line in the margins of the paper. p. 1-19
Image Quality Specify the resolution for scanning originals. p. 1-20
Original Type Select the original type so that the appropriate image processing is p. 1-20
performed before printing the scanned data.
Gamma Correction Adjust the color balance (CMYK) of the scanned data. p. 1-21
Image Control Specify the image processing of the original. p. 1-21
Base Color Level Make the background color (base color) lighter so that the text is easier to p. 1-22
read.
Image Position Adjust the print position. p. 1-22

4-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 4 Storage

Reference
Setting item Use this item to:
Page
Program Specify the number of copies by group (such as corporate division or class). p. 1-24
You can quickly print exactly the number of copies of the number of sets you
need.
Add Cover Add front and back covers to the printout. p. 1-27
Separation Insert slip sheets. When the optional face down finisher or multifunction p. 1-27
finisher is connected, the offset output setting is also available.
Binding Margin Print with a binding margin for the pages. p. 1-28
Specify the binding edge and the value for the binding margin.
Staple/Punch Configure the staple settings. p. 8-7
(When using the optional face down finisher)
Configure the staple and punch settings. p. 8-37
(When using the optional multifunction finisher)
Fold Configure the paper folding settings. p. 8-39
(When using the optional multifunction finisher with the folder unit)
Slow Printing Decrease the printing speed. This also reduces the amount of noise p. 1-29
produced by the machine when printing jobs.
Output Tray Select the output tray for printouts.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray / wide stacking tray p. 8-16
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41
Face Up/Down Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face down in the stacker.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray / wide stacking tray p. 8-16
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41
Output Tray Relay Switch the output tray automatically when the output tray becomes full.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray p. 8-17
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41
Paper Tray Relay Feed paper automatically from a different tray with the same paper size and p. 1-30
paper type when the selected tray runs out of paper.
Auto Image Rotation Rotate the image 90 degrees automatically when the orientation of the p. 1-30
original and paper do not match.
View Selection Select whether to view items as thumbnails or as a list. p. 4-8
Select All Select all of the documents that are displayed. p. 4-8
Save Document Displays the settings screen for saving the data of an original onto the p. 4-8
storage.
Favorites Call frequently used settings. p. 4-8
Check Setting Check the current settings. p. 4-8
Preview Scan and display the original before saving. p. 4-9
before saving
Custom Menu Register favorites and default settings, and edit the button order. p. 4-9
Add Folder Add a new folder. p. 4-9

4-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of Storage Operations

List of Settings in [Storage] - [Load]

When you select a document in the [Storage] - [Load] screen and touch [Change Setting] in the sub menu, the
setting screen is displayed. The settings that can be configured on this screen are listed below.

Reference
Setting item Use this item to:
Page
Paper Selection Change the paper tray, paper type, and feed control settings according to p. 1-8
the copying paper.
Print Density Specify the print density. p. 1-12
Image Position Adjust the print position. p. 1-22
Slow Printing Decrease the printing speed. This also reduces the amount of noise p. 1-29
produced by the machine when printing jobs.
View Selection Select whether to view items as thumbnails or as a list. p. 4-10
Search Search for documents within the folder. p. 4-10
Select All Select all of the documents that are displayed. p. 4-10
Check Setting Check the current settings. p. 4-10

4-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Storage Mode Function Buttons

Function Buttons in Save Document

[Storage] - [Save] Change the settings when saving the document in
a folder.
For more information on the settings buttons, see
"List of Settings in [Storage] - [Save]" (p. 4-5).
Document name

Function buttons

View Selection
Function buttons
You can select whether to view the folders and
documents as thumbnails or as a list. ■ Back
[ ]: View as thumbnails Touch this button to display the folder/document list
[ ]: View as list screen.

■ Favorites
Select All
Brings up settings that have been registered in advance.
Touch this to select all documents that are saved in For more information, see "Favorites" (p. 1-31) in
the selected folder. Touch this again to cancel the "Copying".
selection.

■ Check Setting
Check the settings of the document to save.
For more information, see "Check Setting" (p. 1-32) in
"Copying".

4-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Storage Mode Function Buttons

■ Preview before saving

You can scan and display the original before
1 Touch [Document Name].
The [Document Name Setting] screen is displayed.
saving.

2 Select an option for [Input Method].

1 Touch [Preview before saving].
The [Confirm] screen is displayed.
When [Direct Input] is selected, enter a document
name and touch [OK].

2 Touch [Continue] to start the scan. 3 Touch [OK].

The preview screen is displayed. Check the scan
results.
• For more information on text input, see
"Entering Text" (p. 28).

3 Press the [Start] key.

The data is saved.
• For [Direct Input], you can use upper and lower
case letters.

• When the scanned data contains multiple

pages, flick the screen to move between
different pages. You can also move between Add Folder
pages by touching [ ] or [ ].
Newly add a folder.

4
■ Custom Menu
You can register favorites and default settings, and edit
1 Touch [Add Folder].
The [Folder Name] input screen is displayed.
the button order.
For more information, see "Custom Menu" (p. 1-33) in
"Copying". 2 Enter a folder name and touch [OK].
• For more information on text input, see
"Entering Text" (p. 28) under "Touch Panel".
■ Document Name
• You can use alphanumeric characters (upper
Touch [Document Name] to set the document name that
case/lower case).
will be used when the document is saved in a folder.
[Document Name] • If the entered folder name is already in use, a
Displays the document name with the details specified dialog will appear and it will not be possible to
register the folder.
with [Input Method]. The file extension will not be
displayed.
[Input Method]
[Auto]: Sets the document name automatically. In the
default setting, documents are named as "BOX-" with a
serial number (0001 to 9999) that follows.
[Direct Input]: Used to enter a document name of your
choice.

4-9

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 4 Storage

• For more information on text input, see

Function Buttons in "Entering Text" (p. 28).
[Storage] - [Load] • When a folder is selected in the list of folders/
documents, the search will be performed within
the selected folder.

• When a folder is not selected in the list of

folders/documents, the search will be performed
for all folders that the user who is logged in has
access to.

• The following documents will not be subject to

the search:
- Documents with the [Hide Job Name] check
box selected on the printer driver (p. 3-28 "PIN
Code")
Function buttons - Documents that belong to users other than the
user currently logged in when [Job Name
Display] is set to [OFF] in the administrator
menu
View Selection
You can select whether to view the documents as
thumbnails or as a list. Select All
[ ]: View as thumbnails
Touch this to select all documents that are saved in
[ ]: View as list the selected folder. Touch this again to cancel the
selection.

Search
Change Setting
Search for documents within the folder.
When you select a document and touch [Change

1 Touch [Search].
The [Search] screen is displayed.
Setting] in the sub menu, the settings for printing
the document can be changed.
For more information on the setting buttons, see
"List of Settings in [Storage] - [Load]" (p. 4-7).
2 Enter the string of letters to search
for and touch [OK].
■ Back
Touch this button to display the folder/document list
screen.

■ Check Setting
Use this option to check the current settings of the
change setting screen.
The following setting can be configured from the sub
menu:
• Setting Confirmation Print

4-10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Storage Mode Function Buttons

■ Copy to Folder
Copying to a USB Flash Drive
Documents saved in a folder can be copied to another
or Another Folder folder.

Documents saved in a folder can be copied to a

USB flash drive or another folder.
Select a document and perform the operation
1 Display the sub-menu and touch
[Copy to Folder].
through the sub-menu.

■ Copy to USB Drive 2 Select the folder you wish to save

the document in and touch [OK].
Documents saved in a folder can be copied to a USB
flash drive.

1 Insert
slot.
a USB flash drive into the USB

4
• Only the folders which can be used by the
logged in user are displayed in the [Copy to
Folder] screen.

2 Display the sub-menu and touch

[Copy to USB Drive].
• Select a folder and touch [Open] to confirm a list
of the documents inside the folder.

3 Select the folder you wish to save

the document in and touch [OK].

• By touching [OK] in a state where there are no

folders on the USB flash drive, a folder will be
automatically created and the document will be
copied.

• Select a folder and touch [Open] to confirm a list

of the documents inside the folder.

4-11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 4 Storage

4-12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 USB

You can save the scanned data to a USB flash drive connected to this machine.
You can also print documents that is saved on a USB flash drive from the printer driver.

Overview of USB Operations Overview of USB Operations

(Save)..................................... p. 5-2 (Load).....................................p. 5-3

1. Insert a USB flash drive into the 1. Insert a USB flash drive into the
USB slot. USB slot.

2. Load the original. 2. Select [USB] - [Load] on the

[Home1] screen.

3. Select [USB] - [Save] on the

3. Select a folder.
[Home1] screen.

4. Change the settings. 4. Select a document.

5. Enter the number of copies

5. Press the [Start] key.
using the numeric keys.

6. Press the [Start] key.

USB Mode Function Buttons ................................p. 5-7

This section explains the functions available in USB mode.

5
ComColor GD Series User's Guide
 5 USB
USB

Overview of USB Operations

This section explains the basic operations of the ● 2 Load the original.
USB mode.
For more information on the types of originals that
can be used, see "Originals" in the "Safety
Information".
Saving the Scanned Data
to a USB Flash Drive ■ In the ADF

Save the data scanned using this machine on a

USB flash drive.
1 Load the original in the ADF.
Align the originals and place them face up.

● 1 Insert a USB flash drive into

the USB slot.

2 Slide the original guides to match

the width of the originals.

■ On the Platen Glass

1 Open the original cover.

5-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of USB Operations

2 Load the originals.

Load the original face down on the glass. Align
Printing a Document
the corner of the original with the upper-left Saved on a USB Flash
corner of the glass.
Drive
You can print documents that are saved on a USB
flash drive.
For information on how to save documents on a
USB flash drive, see "Output and Destination"
(p. 3-13) in "Printing".

• Files which can be printed are those in the PRN

format only.
3 Close the original cover.
• PRN files are output by the printer driver in a
format that was developed exclusively for RISO
KAGAKU CORPORATION. PRN files cannot be
• Open and close the original cover gently.
opened using printers or applications by other
manufacturers.

• Files in the PDF format can also be loaded

● 3 Select [USB] - [Save] on the when using the PS kit. For more information,
[Home1] screen. see "Printable Files in the USB Flash Drive"
(p. 8-55) in "Optional Equipment".

● 1 Insert a USB flash drive into 5

the USB slot.

● 2 Select [USB] - [Load] on the

[Home1] screen.

● 4 Select a folder to save the

data to.

● 5 Touch [Save Document].

Specify the detailed settings for saving the
document.
For more information on the functions that can be
configured, see "List of Settings in [USB] - [Save]"
(p. 5-5).

● 6 Press the [Start] key.

5-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 5 USB

● 3 Select the folder you wish to

use and touch [Open].

● 4 Select the document you

wish to print.

● 5 Enter the number of copies

using the numeric keys.

● 6 Press the [Start] key.

5-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of USB Operations

List of Settings in [USB] - [Save]

Select the folder on the [USB] - [Save] screen, and touch [Save Document] to display the screen listing the
setting items. The settings that can be configured on this screen are listed below.

Reference
Setting item Use this item to:
Page
Document Name View and specify the document name when saving the data on a USB flash p. 2-6
drive.
Color Mode Specify the color mode of the data to be scanned. p. 2-7
Scanning Size Specify the scanning size for originals to be scanned. p. 1-10
File Format Specify the file format for saving the scanned data. p. 2-7
Duplex / Simplex Specify the sides of the original to be scanned. p. 2-8
Scanning Level Adjust the scanning level. p. 1-12
Original Orientation Specify the orientation of the original. p. 1-10
Resolution Specify the resolution for scanning originals. p. 2-8
Mixed Size Original Scan the original containing pages of the different original sizes. p. 1-13
Page Size Specify the size for saving the scanned data. p. 2-9
Book Shadow Remove shadows that appear in the center of images when an open book is p. 1-13
Erasure scanned.
Page Split Scan double-spread pages and split them into two parts (right and left). p. 1-14
Original Type Select the original type to perform the appropriate image processing and p. 2-10
save the scanned data. 5
Gamma Correction Adjust the color balance (CMYK) of the scanned data. p. 2-10
Image Control Specify the image processing appropriate for the original. p. 1-21
Base Color Level Make the background color (base color) lighter so that the text is easier to p. 1-22
read.
Reproduction Size Reduce or enlarge the scanned data. p. 2-10
Favorites Call frequently used settings. p. 5-7
Check Setting Check the current settings. p. 5-7
Preview before saving Scan and display the original before saving. p. 5-8
Custom Menu Register favorites and default settings, and edit the button order. p. 5-8

5-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 5 USB

List of Settings in [USB] - [Load]

Select the folder on the [USB] - [Load] screen, and touch [Open] to display a list of the documents inside the
folder. When you select a document and touch [Change Setting] in the sub menu, the setting screen is
displayed.
The settings that can be configured on this screen are listed below.

Reference
Setting item Use this item to:
Page
Paper Selection Change the paper tray, paper type, and feed control settings according to p. 1-8
the copying paper.
Print Density Specify the print density. p. 1-12
Image Position Adjust the print position. p. 1-22
Slow Printing Decrease the printing speed. This also reduces the amount of noise p. 1-29
produced by the machine when printing jobs.
Check Setting Check the current settings. p. 5-9

• When the PS kit is installed, you can load PDF files that are saved on a USB flash drive. In doing so, you can
change the print settings for PDF files. For more information, see "Printable Files in the USB Flash Drive"
(p. 8-55) in "Optional Equipment".

5-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

USB Mode Function Buttons

Function Buttons in Save Document

[USB] - [Save] Change the settings when saving the document on
a USB flash drive.
For more information on the settings that can be
configured, see "List of Settings in [USB] - [Save]"
(p. 5-5).

Function buttons

View Selection
■ Back
You can select whether to view the documents as
Touch this button to display the document list screen. 5
thumbnails or as a list.
[ ]: View as thumbnails
■ Favorites
[ ]: View as list
Brings up settings that have been registered in advance.
For more information, see "Favorites" (p. 1-31) in
"Copying".
Up One
Displays one higher tier. ■ Check Setting
Use this option to check the current settings.
The following settings can be configured from the sub
Open menu:
Opens the selected folder. • Add to Favorites
• Save as Default
• Setting Confirmation Print

5-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 5 USB

■ Preview before saving

You can scan and display the original before saving.
Function Buttons in
For more information, see "Preview before saving" [USB] - [Load]
(p. 4-9) in "Storage".

■ Custom Menu
You can register favorites and default settings, and edit
the button order.
For more information, see "Custom Menu" (p. 1-33) in
"Copying".

Document name
Function buttons
View the document name when saving the data on
a USB flash drive. Touch [Document Name] to set
the document name. For more information, see
"Document Name" (p. 2-6) in "Scanning".
View Selection
You can select whether to view the documents as
• If you select [Auto] for the [Input Method], a
thumbnails or as a list.
document is named with a serial number (0001
to 9999) given following "USB-" as the default [ ]: View as thumbnails
setting. [ ]: View as list

• Touch categories such as [Name] or [Doc.] to

switch the sorting order between ascending and
descending for display in the list.

Up One
Displays one higher tier.

Select All
Touch this to select all documents that are saved in
the selected folder. Touch this again to cancel the
selection.

Open
Opens the selected folder.

5-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 USB Mode Function Buttons

Check Setting Values of Copy to Folder

Document
Documents saved on a USB flash drive can be
Select a document and touch [Details] in the sub- copied to a folder on the machine.
menu to check the setting values of the selected
document.
1 Select a document, display the sub-
menu, and touch [Copy to Folder].

Change Setting
2 Select the folder you wish to save
the document in and touch [OK].
When you select a document and touch [Change
Setting] in the sub menu, the settings for printing
the document can be changed. • A document cannot be copied from one
For more information on the settings that can be folder on the USB flash drive to another
configured, see "List of Settings in [USB] - [Load]" folder on the USB flash drive.
(p. 5-6). • Only the files which can be used by the
logged in user are displayed in the [Copy to
Folder] screen.
■ Back
• Select a folder and touch [Open] to confirm
Touch this button to display the document list screen. a list of the documents inside the folder.

■ Check Setting
Use this option to check the current settings.
The following setting can be configured from the sub 5
menu:
• Setting Confirmation Print

5-9

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 5 USB

5-10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 RISO Console

The RISO Console is software that uses a Web browser to remotely control this machine.
With a computer connected to the printer via a network, you can check the printer status, change
the settings of a job, and perform other operations.

Overview of the RISO Console .............................p. 6-2

Starting the RISO Console

Common Button Operations

[System Info] Menu................................................p. 6-6

This section explains the functions available on the [Consumables],
[Machine Info], [User Info], and [License Info] screens.

[Scan] Menu............................................................p. 6-9

This section explains the functions available on the [Scan] menu.

[Print] Menu ..........................................................p. 6-10

This section explains the functions available on the [Print] menu.

[Storage] Menu.....................................................p. 6-11

This section explains the functions available on the [Storage] menu.

[Job Status] Menu................................................p. 6-12

This section explains the functions available on the [Job Status]
menu.

[Maintenance] Menu ............................................p. 6-13

This section explains the functions available on the [Maintenance]

6
menu.

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 6 Console
RISO Console

Overview of the RISO Console

This section explains the functions of the RISO

• When an item on the side menu has the
Console. icon, this indicates that you must log in before
you can access that item. When an item is
displayed with the icon after logging in, the
access to the mode is restricted.
Top Screen
• The mark is displayed on the left side of the
screen while information on the machine is
• Make sure the machine is connected to the being collected.
network.
• The supported Web browsers are as follows.
- Windows Internet Explorer Ver9.0
Status pane
- Windows Internet Explorer Ver10.0
- Windows Internet Explorer Ver11.0
- Microsoft Edge
- Safari (for Mac OS)

• The RISO Console screen is not displayed

when using certain power saving settings.
Contact your administrator for details.

• The side menu that is displayed will differ

depending on the settings configured by the
administrator.

Side Menu Content pane

6-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of the RISO Console

Job Status
Side Menu
Active/Idle Search, view, or delete p. 6-12
The information and the functions that are available jobs that are being
on the side menu of the RISO Console are as listed processed or waiting.
below. Finished Search, view, delete, or p. 6-12
re-print jobs that have
System Info finished.
Consumables View the status of the p. 6-6 Maintenance
consumables, such as the
remaining amount of ink Head Clean the print head. p. 6-13
or paper. Cleaning
Machine Info • View the status of the p. 6-6 Glue Preheat the glue unit. p. 6-13
printer. Temperature (when using the optional
• View the printer model, Perfect Binder)
serial number, MAC
address, and other
system information.
• Confirm the detailed
count.
User Info View information about p. 6-7
the user currently logged
in.
License Info View the license p. 6-8
information of the system
used in this product.
Scan
Search, view, delete, or download scan p. 6-9
jobs that are saved on the internal hard
disk of this machine.
Print
p. 6-10
6
View or delete jobs.

Storage
Load • Search documents in a p. 6-11
folder.
• Edit folders (add,
change color, etc.)
Form Data Search, view, print, or p. 8-54
delete jobs that are output
via [Form] from the printer
driver. (when the optional
PS kit is installed)

6-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 6 RISO Console

Starting the RISO Logging In

Console When an item on the side menu has the icon,
this indicates that you must log in before you can
Connect the computer to the network before
access that item.
starting the RISO Console. Connection to the
Internet is not required.
1 Enter your user name and password
in the status pane.
1 Start your Web browser. Your password should consist of 0 to 16 characters
(numbers and/or lower case letters). The entered
2 Enter the IP address of the printer in
the address box of your Web
characters are displayed with asterisks (*).

browser.
To view the IP Address of the printer, select
2 Click [Login].
The [System Info] - [Consumables] screen is
[Machine Info] in [System Info] on the operation displayed.
panel of this machine.

Example of how to enter the IP address ■ Logging Out

"192.168.1.99" Click [Logout] in the status pane.

• If you forget your password, contact your

administrator.

• You can change the user password on the

[System Info] - [User Info] screen. (p. 6-7 "[User
Info] Screen")

3 Press the [Enter] key.

The [System Info] screen of the RISO Console is
displayed.

• You can create a shortcut on the desktop to

quickly bring up the RISO Console.

6-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of the RISO Console

A Search
Common Button Use this function to search jobs.
You can use search strings up to 256 characters long.
Operations
B Menu
The [Scan] menu screen, [Print] menu screen, Select a job and click a menu option.
[Storage] menu screen, and [Job Status] screen The menu options displayed depend on the screen.
have common buttons that serve the same
purposes. C Title bar (list display only)
The [Scan] menu screen is used here as an You can sort jobs by clicking an item in the title bar
example to explain the respective functions. ([Document Name], [Owner], [Pages], or [Date and Time
Saved]).
Thumbnail Display
D Select All
Select this option if you want to select all jobs.

E Jobs
To select a job, click the job name to add a check mark.

F Number of jobs displayed on a page

Select the number of jobs to be displayed on a page.

G Display switching ([Scan] screen and [Print]

screen only)
Click or to switch between list and thumbnail
display.

List display H Page switching

or : Moves to the first or last page.

or : Moves to the previous or next page.

1 2...: Moves to the specified page that you click.
6
• If you select a job with a PIN code assigned, the
PIN code input screen is displayed. Enter the
PIN code and click [OK].

• You can select more than one job.

• If the job name, owner, or folder name exceeds

the maximum displayable number of characters,
they are displayed with the first part of the name
omitted and replaced with "...".

6-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 [System Info] Menu

[Consumables] Screen [Machine Info] Screen

This screen displays information on the ink and This screen displays the status of this machine, the
paper. connection status of optional equipment, the serial
number, used space on the internal hard disk and
other system-related information.

Remaining Amount of Ink

The remaining amount of ink is displayed in 10 levels for
each ink cartridge.
The indicator starts flashing when the time to replace an
ink cartridge comes close.
Prepare a new ink cartridge for the color that flashes.

• The remaining amount of ink is indicated based

on the bottle capacity. Machine Status
The status of this machine, availability of trays, and
• If you are not using RISO ink, the remaining
connection status of optional equipment are all displayed.
amount of ink is not displayed.
If an error occurs, the error message is displayed.

Paper Status Machine Info

The estimated remaining amount of paper, paper size, Model: Machine model.
paper type, thickness, and whether Auto Selection is ON Serial No.: Machine serial number.
are all displayed for each tray. MAC address (LAN0/LAN1): Machine MAC address.
The remaining amount of paper is displayed in 5 levels IP address (IPv4/IPv6) (LAN0/LAN1): Machine IP
for Feed Trays 1 through 3. There is no paper status address.
indicator for the standard tray. When is displayed, HDD Usage: Ratio of used internal hard disk space.
please be sure to reload paper. HDD data encryption: Displays the status (ON or OFF) of
the data encryption setting of the internal hard disk.
For the paper settings, see "Changing the Paper Tray
Internal Clock: Date and time of the machine's internal
Setting" (p. 1-8) in "Copying".
clock.
Comment: Comments entered by the administrator.
Only a user with the administrator account can enter
comments.
Firmware: Version of the firmware.

6-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 [System Info] Menu

[System Info Print]

Click this button to print the system information. [User Info] Screen
[Sample Image Print]
Click this button to print a sample page so you can check The information about the user currently logged in
the result of a printed image. is displayed.
• If login is unnecessary, the [User Info] screen is
not displayed.
Checking the Detailed Count
The total count of prints and copies of this machine
and the count for each paper size are displayed.

[Change Password]
You can change the password.
User Info
[Print This List] This screen displays the user name and groups of the
Click this button to print the latest information. user logged in.
[Download as CSV File] Limits
Click this button to save the latest information to a The printable and copyable limits established by the
computer as a CSV file. administrator and the current number of printouts and
[Service Count] copies made by the user logged in are displayed.
The total number of prints and copies made with this
• The information displayed is registered by the
6
machine is displayed.
administrator. If the facts are different from the
Detailed Count
information displayed, contact your
The count for each paper size is displayed.
administrator.

• When you click [Print This List] or [Download as

CSV File], the latest information is obtained and
may be different from the information displayed
on the screen.

6-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 6 RISO Console

Changing the Login Password [License Info] Screen

Users can change their own login passwords.
The [License Info] screen displays information
about the license of the system used in the
1 Click [Change Password]. machine.

2 Enter the new password in [New

Password].
Your password should consist of 0 to 16 characters
(numerals and/or lower case letters). The entered
characters are displayed with asterisks (*).

3 Enter the new password again for

confirmation.

4 Click [OK].
The screen is displayed to indicate that the settings
are sent.

5 Click [OK].

6-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

[Scan] Menu

[Scan] Menu Screen Downloading Scanned Jobs

to a Computer
You can download the scanned data saved on the
internal hard disk of this machine to a computer.
1 Select the check box of the scanned
job to download.
You can select more than one job.

2 Click [Download].
The screen indicating that a zip file is being created
is displayed.
• For jobs with a PIN code, the PIN code input
screen is displayed. Enter the PIN code and click
[OK].

3 Click the link to the zip file.

The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

[Download]
Download the selected job.
[Delete]
4 Specify the destination folder and
file name, and then click [Save].
Click this button to delete the selected jobs. The scanned data is saved to the computer.
[Details]
You can view the settings, file capacity, and other 6
information on the selected job.

• The storage period for scanned jobs is

configured by the administrator with [Scan
Document Save Setting]. When that period is
reached, the job is deleted automatically.

6-9

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 [Print] Menu

[Print] Menu Screen

You can check the status of jobs that are sent from
the printer driver and saved on the internal hard
disk of this machine.

[Delete]
Click this button to delete the selected jobs.
[Details]
You can view the settings, file capacity, and other
information on the selected job.

• In the following cases, all job names are

displayed in the list:
- When user login is not required
- When the user is logged in with the
administrator account

• In the following cases, the job name is displayed

as "*****":
- Jobs with the [Hide Job Name] check box
selected on the printer driver (p. 3-28 "PIN
Code")
- Jobs that belong to users other than the user
currently logged in when [Job Name Display]
is set to [OFF] on the administrator menu

6-10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

[Storage] Menu

[Load] Screen Managing Documents in a

Folder
The shared folders and personal folders are
displayed. [Close]
Close the document list screen and display the [Load]
screen.
[Print]
Print the selected documents.
[Delete]
Delete the selected documents.
[Copy to Folder]
Select the folder that you want to copy to, and click this
button to copy the documents.
[Details]
Click this button to view the settings for the selected
document. You can also change the settings.
[Download]
If the optional PS kit is installed, you can save the
[Open]
selected PostScript jobs to a computer.
Click this button to display a list of documents in the
folder.
[Add]
Click this button to add a folder.
1 Select a folder and click [Open].
The screen displays a list of documents in that
You can enter 1 to 128 characters for the folder name. folder.
[Change Color] 6
Click this button to change the color of the selected
folder. 2 Operate documents.
The following functions are available for selected
[Rename]
documents:
Click this button to change the name of a folder.
• Print
You can enter 1 to 128 characters for the folder name.
• Delete
• The functions may not be available, depending • Copy to Folder
on how the administrator has configured the • Details
settings. • Download

6-11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 [Job Status] Menu

[Active / Idle] Screen [Finished] Screen

The jobs that are being printed and the jobs that are The [Finished] screen displays finished print jobs,
waiting to be printed are displayed. suspended print jobs, and print jobs with errors.

The field for [Status] shows the status of each job The field for [Result] shows the result of each job
("Printing", "Suspended", etc.). ("Completed", "Error", etc.).

[Delete] [Reprint]
Click this button to delete the selected jobs. Click this button to print the selected job again.
[Details] [Delete]
Click this button to view the settings for the selected job. Click this button to delete the selected jobs.
The displayed contents differ depending on the job type. [Details]
Click this button to view the settings for the selected job.
• An icon indicating the job type is displayed on The displayed contents differ depending on the job type.
the left side of the job name. For more
information, see "[Active / Idle] Screen" (p. 36) • The finished jobs are only displayed when the
in "About Jobs". [Finished Job Setting] on the administrator
menu is set to [Save].

• The print function is not available in the

following cases:
- When a job that did not finish properly is
selected
- When a non-print job is selected
- When printing of a finished job is not permitted
- When a color job is selected although color
printing is not permitted

• The storage period for jobs is configured by the

administrator.

• An icon indicating the job type is displayed on

the left side of the job name. For more
information, see "[Finished] Screen" (p. 37) in
"About Jobs".

6-12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

[Maintenance] Menu

[Maintenance] Menu Glue Temperature

Screen Preheats the glue unit when using the optional
Perfect Binder.
On this screen, you can configure the user- For more information, see the user's guide for the
configurable functions of the printer main unit Perfect Binder.
(system).

[Head Cleaning]
Click this item to clean the print head to prevent clogging.
Clean the print head when you notice a change in image
quality, such as blurring in part of a printout, white
streaking, or faded colors.
When the printer is being used, cleaning of the print head
is performed after the printer has finished printing or
copying.
[Glue Temperature]
Preheats the glue unit when using the optional Perfect
Binder.
6
Head Cleaning

1 Click [Head Cleaning].

2 Click [OK].
The screen is displayed to indicate that the settings
are sent.

3 Click [OK].

6-13

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 6 RISO Console

6-14

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Using the Barcode Area Definition Software

The Barcode Area Definition Software is an application software which is common to the
ComColor GD series and FW series products.
The software is used to specify information about the barcode print position, so that highly
readable barcodes can be created in documents.
This chapter describes how to install and operate the Barcode Area Definition Software, and how
to register a file that defines the barcode position to the printer.

Overview of the Barcode Area Definition

Software ....................................................................p. 7-2

Installing the Barcode Area Definition

Software

Creating and Registering a Barcode Area

Definition File............................................................p. 7-5

1. Create a PRN file.

2. Read the PRN file.

3. Specify the barcode area.

4. Save the barcode area definition file.

7
5. Register the barcode area definition file.

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 7 Barcode
Barcode Area Definition Software

Overview of the Barcode Area Definition Software

Installing the Barcode Installing

Area Definition Software • Log in as a user with administrator privilege.

You need to install the Barcode Area Definition • Close all active applications.
Software before using it for the first time.

1 Load the included RISO Printer

Driver DVD-ROM in the computer's
Operating Environment DVD-ROM drive.
The system requirements for activating the
Barcode Area Definition Software are described in
the table below. 2 Open the [Utility] -
[BarcodeAreaDefinitionSoftware]
Memory 1 GB or more folder on the DVD-ROM, and double-
CPU Intel or fully compatible CPU click the "setup.exe" file.
Hard disk 2 GB or more free space

Display
(Sufficient to operate the OS)
1024 × 768 or greater resolution
3 Click [Next].
4 Select [I accept the terms in license
agreement] and click [Next].

5 Follow the on-screen instructions to

configure the settings.

• When installation is complete, a "Readme"

screen is displayed. The "Readme" screen
includes precautions for using the
machine. Be sure to read this information.

6 Remove the DVD-ROM from the

computer.

• Keep the DVD-ROM in a safe place for future

reference.

7-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Overview of the Barcode Area Definition Software

■ Uninstalling
Main Screen
1 Click [Start] - [Control Panel] -
[Programs and Features] -
[BarcodeAreaDefinitionSoftware] -
[Uninstall].

2 Follow the on-screen instructions to

uninstall the Barcode Area
Definition Software.

3 After the Barcode Area Definition

Software has been uninstalled,
restart the computer.

Starting the Barcode

Area Definition Software A Menu bar
The menu bar consists of the [File], [Edit], [View], [Tools]

1 Click
and [More] menus. Each menu includes an edit function
[Start] - [All Programs] - [RISO]
and setting items.
- [Barcode Area Definition Software].
• For Windows 10, click [Start] - [All Apps] - [RISO] - B Tool bar
[Barcode Area Definition Software]. Various tools are displayed.
• For Windows 8.1, open the "Apps" screen and
select [RISO] - [Barcode Area Definition Software]. C Thumbnail
A thumbnail of the print image is displayed.

D Image/barcode area display

The print image is displayed.

E Status bar 7
The position (coordinates), magnification, page number
and other details are displayed.

7-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 7 Using the Barcode Area Definition Software

Menu bar Function

Operations
Area minor Displays the coordinates (X/
To edit the barcode area, select the print image adjustment tool (X/ Y), width (W), and height (H)
area and use the functions in the tool bar or menu Y/W/H) of the barcode area in the
bar. When the same icon appears in both the tool display unit format (mm/inch).
bar and the menu bar, you can click either one to Enter a value in the box to
change the barcode area to a
perform the same operation.
specified position or size.
(This is only displayed in the
Menu bar Function
tool bar.)
File Rotate Rotates the on-screen print
Open Image Opens a selected print file, image 90 degrees to the left
File and display its image. or right.
Open CSV Opens a selected CSV file. Display Units You can specify mm or inch
File as the unit to use on the
barcode area definition page.
Recreate CSV File Deletes the barcode area that
is displayed. Zoom You can specify the
/ / magnification ratio for the
Save Saves the CSV file that you
print image, fit the full image
are currently using.
on the page, fit the image to
Save As Saves the currently open file the width of the page, enlarge
under a new file name. it, or reduce it.
Page Settings You can specify the page size Thumbnail Displays or hides the
of a barcode creation area. thumbnail.
Edit Status Bar Displays or hides the status
Undo Cancels the previous edit. bar.

Redo Reapplies the previously Tool Bar Displays or hides the tool bar.
canceled edit. The 10 most Tools
recent edits can be redone.
Hand Tool You can drag a print image to
Copy Copies the selected barcode change its display position.
area.
Selection Tool You can select a barcode
Paste Pastes the copied barcode area. Press and hold the Ctrl
area to another area. key to select multiple barcode
Delete Deletes the selected barcode areas.
area. The selected area is indicated
by .
Repetition You can specify the same
barcode area repeatedly. You Creation Tool You can specify the barcode
can specify a cycle of 1 to 999 area, where the print density
pages. is adjusted to make the area
suitable for reading.
View The enclosed area is
Move Moves to the first, previous, indicated by .
/ / / next, or last page. Auto Area Automatically detects the
Go to Moves to the specified page. Detection barcode area on all pages or
Input the desired page specified pages.
number in the text box, and More
press the [Enter] key.
(This is only displayed in the Version Displays the version
tool bar.) information.

7-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Creating and Registering a Barcode Area Definition File

Output the original data from the printer driver in 7 If the optional PS kit is installed,
PRN file format. Open the PRN file using the use the RISO Console to
Barcode Area Definition Software, specify the
barcode area, and create a CSV file.
download documents saved in
The administrator uses the RISO Console to the folder.
register the barcode area definition file to the Start the RISO Console, select the saved
printer. documents on the [Load] screen in the [Storage]
menu, and then click [Download].

• Configure the same settings for the printer

Procedure driver as when you actually print, except for the
[Output] setting. If the PRN file format and the
actual print setting (original size, print direction,
● 1 Create a PRN file. paper size, imposition, etc.) are different, the
Output the original with printed barcode in PRN file barcode area definition may not be correctly
applied. If you change any settings related to
format.
the layout, the coordinates of the area also
change.
1 Click [Properties] (or [Details]) in
• PRN files are output by the printer driver in a
the printing dialog box of the format that was developed exclusively for RISO
application on the computer. KAGAKU CORPORATION. PRN files cannot be
opened using printers or applications by other
manufacturers.
2 Click the [Basic] tab.

3 Select [Save as a File] in the ● 2 Read the PRN file.

[Output] pull-down menu. Open the PRN file (print image) using the Barcode
Area Definition Software.
• If the optional PS kit is installed, select
[Storage]. 1 Click [Start] - [All Programs] -
7
[RISO] - [Barcode Area Definition
4 Click [Details], and specify a Software].
destination. For Windows 8.1, open the "Apps" screen and
select [RISO] - [Barcode Area Definition
5 Click [OK]. Software].

6 Click [Print]. 2 Click [File] - [Open Image File],

and select the PRN file.
A PRN file is created in the specified destination.

3 Specify the number of pages to

read.
Select the [Detect Barcode Areas Automatically.]
check box to automatically detect the barcode
area on all pages.

7-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 7 Using the Barcode Area Definition Software

4 Click [OK]. The enclosed area is colored and specified as the

barcode area.
The print image of the original appears in the
image/barcode area. To edit the barcode area, use the edit tool and menu bar.
(p. 7-4 "Operations")
• If you use mixed-size data, the original data If automatic barcode area detection was used, make sure
may be oriented differently from the print that the barcode was detected properly. If the detected
image. Select [View] in the menu bar, area is not aligned with the barcode, use (selection
rotate the print image in the same direction tool) to adjust the position.
as the original data, and specify the
barcode area.
■ Thumbnail Display
• The maximum barcode size that can be
read by [Detect Barcode Areas The top left corner of a thumbnail image is the base point,
Automatically.] is 100 mm (W) × 30 mm (H) and the original image and barcode area definition image
(3 15/16" × 1 3/16"), and the minimum size are displayed overlapping each other. If the original
is 20 mm (W) × 5 mm (H) (13/16" × 7/32"). image and barcode area definition image are not the
same size, a thumbnail like the one shown below is
• The barcode area may not be detected displayed. To specify a barcode area in the portion that is
automatically in the following cases: grayed out, align the original image and barcode area
- When the space between barcodes is 5 mm definition image in the same direction.
(7/32") or less
- When the barcode image is not clear
- When the barcode is placed at an angle, or
when the black bars are not straight
- When the bars are not true black (RGB 0.0.0)
- When the space between the bars is not true
white (RGB 255.255.255)

● 3 Specify the barcode area.

In this example, the original image (solid line) is smaller
Use to surround the barcode on the screen. than the barcode area definition image (dotted line).
The portion outside the barcode area definition image is
grayed out.

• You can specify up to 50 barcodes per page on

as many as 30 pages. If you specify
[Repetition], you can apply areas repeatedly.

• Barcode areas can be moved on the same page

using (selection tool). To move barcode
areas to a different page, copy and paste them
to the desired page. You cannot paste the
copied barcode area if it is larger than the
original.

7-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Creating and Registering a Barcode Area Definition File

■ Precautions Regarding Barcode Area • The CSV file specifies the size (W, H) and
Definition position coordinates (X, Y) of the barcode on a
printout (in 0.1 mm (0.004") units) relative to the
If the position information of the specified barcode area
base point, which is the top left corner of the
changes, such as when an image is rotated, the barcode
original data created on a computer.
area will not be processed correctly.
If the image is rotated or the print direction is changed, Base point
use the creation tool to specify the barcode area again. x
(Correct the barcode area starting from the base point.)

Request for Toner

Base
[ Collection
point

y
\

W
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION
Example of when
barcode processing is
performed correctly
Base
[
● 5 Register the barcode area
point
definition file.
Register the barcode area definition file to the
\ printer in the administrator menu on the RISO
Console. For more information, see the
"Administrator's Guide".

Example of when barcode

processing is not performed 7
correctly, because the original is
rotated and the position of the
barcode relative to the base point
is changed

● 4 Save the barcode area

definition file.
Click in the menu bar. The barcode area
definition file is output (saved) in CSV format.
To change the file name when saving, select [Save
As] in the [File] menu.

7-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 7 Using the Barcode Area Definition Software

Repetition Function
If you use the [Repetition] function when specifying the barcode areas, the areas are specified repeatedly for
subsequent pages based on the value specified for [Cycle] in the [Repetition] dialog box. This eliminates the
need to define the area on each and every page.
• When cycle is 0: The barcode areas are applied only on the pages that are configured in the barcode area
definition file.
• When cycle is 1: The barcode areas configured for the first page in the barcode area definition file are
repeated on each page until the last one.
• When cycle is 2: The barcode areas configured for the first 2 pages in the barcode area definition file are
repeated on every 2 pages until the last one.
• When cycle is 3: The barcode areas configured for the first 3 pages in the barcode area definition file are
repeated on every 3 pages until the last one.

In the example below, barcode areas are defined for 3 pages.

Original data p.1 p.2 p.3 p.4 p.5 p.6 p.7 p.8 p.9 p.10 p.11 p.12 p.13

Barcode area
definition

p.1 p.2 p.3 p.4 p.5 p.6 p.7 p.8 p.9 p.10 p.11 p.12 p.13
Cycle: 0
The pages that you
configure in a barcode Barcode processing is not configured for pages 4 to 13.
area definition file

Cycle: 3 p.1 p.2 p.3 p.4 p.5 p.6 p.7 p.8 p.9 p.10 p.11 p.12 p.13
The pages that you
configure in a barcode Repeated pages Repeated pages Repeated pages
area definition file

• You can specify from 1 to 999 pages for [Cycle].

• The pages after the ones set in the repetition process do not appear in the thumbnails.

Printing Barcode Originals

You can select a registered barcode area definition file from the [Barcode Area Definition] pull-down menu in
the [Image] tab on the printer driver screen.
Select a suitable barcode area definition file when printing a barcode original. (p. 3-26 "Barcode Area
Definition")

7-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Optional Equipment

This chapter describes the optional equipment that can be used with this machine.

Face Down Finisher ...............................................p. 8-2

This section describes the settings and functions that are available
when the face down finisher is connected.

High Capacity Feeder ............................................p. 8-8

This section describes the settings and functions that are available
when the high capacity feeder is connected.

Stacking Tray (Auto-control Stacking Tray / Wide

Stacking Tray) ......................................................p. 8-13
This section describes the settings and functions that are available
when the auto-control stacking tray/wide stacking tray is connected.

High Capacity Stacker .........................................p. 8-18

This section describes the settings and functions that are available
when the high capacity stacker is connected.

Multifunction Finisher .........................................p. 8-26

This section describes the settings and functions that are available
when the multifunction finisher is connected.

PS Kit ....................................................................p. 8-42

This section describes the settings and functions that are available
when the PS kit is installed.

8
ComColor GD Series User's Guide
 8 Optional
Equipment
Optional Equipment

Face Down Finisher

If the optional face down finisher is connected, you can staple printed sheets, or perform offset output for each
set of printed documents.

A Stacking Tray
Normal (except for the When using B5 or
Printouts are output face down. case shown on the right) smaller paper without
B Stacking Tray Setting Position staples
Slide into position depending on the paper type or output
condition.
C Jam Release Cover
D Staple Cartridge
Pull out the staple cartridge to replace staples, or if a
staple is jammed.
E Staple Cover
Open this cover if a staple is jammed, or to replace the
staple cartridge.
F Face Down Finisher Socket
Connect the face down finisher power cord.
Align  and . Position  and  apart
• The stacking tray slides. For normal output,
from each other.
align the  and  shown in B.

8-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Face Down Finisher

List of Settings Copy Mode

The items described below can be set when the Setting item Use this item to: See
face down finisher is connected.
Program Specify the number of p. 1-24
copies by group (such
as corporate division or
Printer Driver class).
Offset Stack sets of printed p. 8-6
Output documents slightly
Setting item Use this item to: See ([Program]) apart from one another
[Finishing] tab to create separation.

Staple Select the stapling p. 8-4 Separation Specify where to insert p. 1-27
position. slip sheets between
printouts.
Offset Output Stack sets of printed p. 8-6
documents slightly Offset Output Stack sets of printed p. 8-6
apart from one another ([Separation]) documents slightly
when printing multiple apart from one another
copies. to create separation.

[Advanced] Tab Staple Configure the staple p. 8-7

settings.
Program Specify the number of p. 3-28
copies by group (such
as corporate division or
class).
Offset Stack sets of printed p. 8-6
Output documents slightly
(Program) apart from one another
to create separation.

• When [Staple] is grayed out in the [Finishing]

tab, make sure that [Printer Configuration] on
the [Environment] tab has been configured
correctly. (p. 3-32 "Printer Configuration")

8-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Types of paper that can be stapled

Printer Driver Settings • Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4-LEF 1, B5, B5-LEF,
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-LEF, Foolscap

Staple 182 mm -
297 mm
Select the stapling position. (7 3/16" -
11 11/16") Paper feed
• When [Staple] is configured, make sure to and output
direction
configure [Binding Edge].
257 mm - 432 mm
• When [Staple] is configured, [Sort] is set to (10 1/8" - 17")
[Collated]. (p. 3-10 "Sort")

• When [Mixed Size Original] is configured, • Paper weight: 52 g/m2 - 210 g/m2
[Staple] is [OFF]. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size Original") (14-lb bond - 56-lb bond)

• When [Booklet] is configured, [Staple] is [OFF]. Number of sheets that can be stapled
(p. 3-16 "Booklet") • Standard size paper
A4, A4-LEF, B5, B5-LEF (Letter, Letter-LEF):
• The orientation of the paper varies depending 2 to 50 sheets 2
on the binding edge. See "Staple Function and Sizes other than the above (A3, B4 (Ledger,
Loading Orientation of the Paper" (p. 8-5). Legal, Foolscap)): 2 to 25 sheets 2
1 Long Edge Feed
If you select [Left] or [Right] for [Binding Edge], select 2 When using plain paper and recycled paper
(85 g/m2 (23- lb bond))
from the following options:
[OFF], [1 Staple], [2 Staples]
• Stapling cannot be performed when using
If you select [Top] for [Binding Edge], select from the
irregular-sized paper.
following options:
[OFF], [Left 1 Staple], [Right 1 Staple], [2 Staples] • When the printing job exceeds the maximum
number of sheets that can be stapled, a
confirmation screen is displayed so that you can
Left 1 Staple Right 1 Staple select whether to stop printing or continue
2 Staples printing without stapling.
1 Staple 1 Staple

2 Staples 2 Staples

Binding edge

8-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Face Down Finisher

Staple Function and Loading Orientation of the Paper

The orientation in which to load the paper in the paper tray (standard tray) and the stapling position are as
listed below.

Orientation: Portrait Orientation: Landscape Face up data Face down data

Staple

Binding
Staple position
edge
1 Staple 2 Staples

Left

1 Staple 2 Staples

Right

Left 1 Staple Right 1 Staple 2 Staples

Top

Paper
transfer Paper feed and
output direction

• When paper of the corresponding size is not loaded in the tray, a message will appear.
Follow the displayed instructions and load the tray with paper.

• For [1 Staple], depending on the paper size and loaded direction, the angle of the staple may differ from the
above drawing or the printing image shown on the printer driver screen.

8-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Offset Output Copy Mode Settings

Stack sets of printed documents slightly apart from
one another when printing multiple copies.
Offset Output ([Program])
• When [Program] is configured, [Offset Output] is
[OFF]. (p. 3-28 "Program") In addition to the "Program" (p. 1-24) function for
copying, you can stack sets of printed documents
• This setting is not available for paper sizes that slightly apart from one another to create
cannot be output to the face down finisher. separation.
• When using the face down finisher, you cannot
[OFF]
use this setting with stapling.
Offset output is not performed.
• When [Mixed Size Original] is configured, [Between Sets]
[Offset Output] is [OFF]. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size
Each set of printed documents is stacked slightly apart
Original")
from one another.
[Between Groups]
[OFF] Groups of printed documents are stacked slightly apart
Offset output is not performed. from one another.
[Between Sorts]
Sets of printed documents specified in [Sort] are stacked
slightly apart from one another. Offset Output ([Separation])
[Between Jobs]
Finished print jobs are stacked slightly apart from one In addition to the "Separation" (p. 1-27) function for
another. copying, you can stack sets of printed documents
slightly apart from one another to create
separation.
Offset Output (Program)
• You cannot use [Offset Output] and [Mixed Size
Original] at the same time. (p. 1-13 "Mixed Size
In addition to the "Program" (p. 3-28) function for
Original")
printouts, you can stack sets of printed documents
slightly apart from one another to create
separation. [OFF]
Offset output is not performed.
[OFF]
[Between Sorts]
Offset output is not performed.
Each sorted set is stacked slightly apart from one
[Between Sets]
another.
Sets of printed documents are stacked slightly apart from
[After a Job]
one another.
Each print job is stacked slightly apart from one another.
[Between Groups]
Groups of printed documents are stacked slightly apart Paper that can be offset
from one another. • When using the face down finisher:
131 mm × 148 mm - 305 mm × 550 mm
(5 3/16" × 5 27/32" - 12" × 21 5/8")

1 Touch [Separation].
2 Select the offset output setting.
3 Touch [OK].
8-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Face Down Finisher

■ Binding Edge
Staple
Select the binding edge of the paper.
Staple at the specified position. Left, Right, Top

Types of paper that can be stapled

• Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4-LEF 1, B5, B5-LEF, ■ Staple
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-LEF, Foolscap
Select the stapling position.
If you select the left or the right for [Binding Edge], select
182 mm - from the following options:
297 mm [OFF], 1 staple, 2 staples
(7 3/16" -
11 11/16") If you select the top for [Binding Edge], select from the
Paper feed
following options:
and output
direction [OFF], left 1 staple, right 1 staple, 2 staples
257 mm - 432 mm
(10 1/8" - 17")
• The left 1 staple and the right 1 staple are
displayed only when the top is selected for
• Paper weight: 52 g/m2 - 210 g/m2 [Binding Edge].
(14-lb bond - 56-lb bond)

Number of sheets that can be stapled

• Standard size paper 1 Touch [Staple].
A4, A4-LEF, B5, B5-LEF (Letter, Letter-LEF):
2 to 50 sheets 2
Sizes other than the above (A3, B4 (Ledger,
2 Configure [Binding Edge].
Legal, Foolscap)): 2 to 25 sheets 2
1 Long Edge Feed
2 When using plain paper and recycled paper
3 Configure [Staple].
(85 g/m2 (23- lb bond))
4 Touch [OK].
• When the printing job exceeds the maximum
number of sheets that can be stapled, a
confirmation screen is displayed so that you can ■ Binding Margin
select whether to stop printing or continue
You can specify the binding margin so that staples are
printing without stapling.
not in the printing area.
• Stapling cannot be performed when using
irregular-sized paper.

• The [Staple], [Booklet], and [Page Border]

1 Touch [Binding Margin] on the
[Staple] screen.
functions cannot be used at the same time.
(p. 1-16 "Booklet", p. 1-19 "Page Border") The [Binding Margin] screen is displayed.
8
■ Original Orientation 2 Specify the binding margin.
• Select [Binding Edge].
[Top Side Up] • Use [ ], [ ], or the numeric keys to enter the
Select this option when loading originals in an orientation width.
from which they can be read normally. • If part of the printing area is missing due to the
[Top Side Left] binding margin setting, set [Auto Reduction] to
Select this option when loading originals so that the top [ON].
of the original is aligned with the left edge.

3 Touch [OK].

8-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 High Capacity Feeder

By connecting the optional high capacity feeder, it is possible to load the unit with approximately 4,000 sheets
of printing paper (when using plain paper, recycled paper).

A Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Lever G Envelope Guide Angle Adjustment Lever
Use this lever to adjust the paper feed pressure for either Use this leve to adjust the angle of inclination of the
[Standard] or [Card] to suit the paper type loaded in the envelope guide. The angle of the envelope guide can be
high capacity feeder. adjusted to four levels.
B Standard Tray Descent Button H Envelope Guide Paper Feed Pressure
Use this button to move the high capacity feeder up or Adjustment Lever
down when replacing or adding the paper to it. Use this lever to adjust the paper feed pressure to suit
C Paper Feed Guide Levers the paper quality of the envelope being used.
Pinch these levers to slide the paper feed guide. Release I Standard Tray Padding Covers
the levers to fix the paper feed guide in position. Levers Remove the covers when you load sheets smaller than
are located on both sides of the standard tray paper A4 (Letter) or larger than A3 (Ledger), or C5/DL-LEF
guide, in two places. envelopes.
D Front Cover J High Capacity Feeder Socket
Open this cover when there is a paper jam. Connect the high capacity feeder power cord. The socket
E Standard Tray Paper Guide is located on the right side in the rear of the standard
This guide prevents paper in the high capacity feeder tray.
from becoming misaligned.
F Envelope Guide • The standard tray cannot be used when the
Use this guide when printing on an envelope. Depending high capacity feeder is connected.
on the type of envelope being used, it is necessary to
K Transfer Cover
adjust the angle of inclination.
If a paper jam occurs, open this cover and remove the
jammed sheet.

8-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 High Capacity Feeder

• When a large amount of paper is loaded at

Loading the Paper once, it is difficult to properly adjust the guides
and may prevent the paper from being loaded

1 Spread the paper feed guides.

Pinch the paper feed guide levers (both sides) to
correctly. (The paper may bend, warp, or be
misaligned.) Divide the paper into several bulks
when loading the paper. When setting a large
unlock and slide the guides.
amount of paper at once, see "When Setting a
Large Amount of Paper at Once" (p. 8-11).

• Be sure to load envelopes with their flaps open

and their bottom side entering the machine first.
The adjustment of the angle of inclination of the
envelope guide is configured using the
envelope guide angle adjustment lever.
Note that it is also necessary to adjust the paper
feed pressure depending on the paper quality of
the envelopes being used. Configure the
pressure with the envelope guide paper
pressure adjustment lever. Slide the lever while
2 Load the paper.
Load the paper with the printing side face up.
lifting it up. See the sticker near the lever to set
a pressure that is appropriate for the envelopes
being used.

Keep this
surface
level

Envelope guide Envelope guide

paper feed pressure angle adjustment
adjustment lever lever

Envelopes of
thick paper
Envelopes of thin
paper or paper
8
Envelopes of
thin paper Thick paper or long
Paper other envelopes
than envelopes

8-9

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

3 Adjust the paper feed guides so that

they are suitable for the paper size.
Regarding the Standard Tray
Slide the guides while pinching the paper feed guide
Padding Covers
levers to match the guides against the edges of the
Depending on the size of the paper being used, the
paper, and release the paper feed guide levers to fix
the guides in position.
standard tray padding covers may or may not be
necessary.

■ Cases When the Standard Tray

Padding Covers Are Necessary
Properly attach and use the standard tray padding covers
when the paper size is B5-LEF, A4-LEF, B4, A3, or a
custom size having a width of 257 mm (10 1/8") or more.

4 Adjust the paper feed pressure

adjustment lever.
For general use, set to "NORMAL". For thick paper
or other paper for special purposes, set to "CARD".

5 On the operation panel, check the

tray settings.
Configure the paper size and type with [Paper Tray].
When changing the paper loaded in a tray, be sure
to change the settings in [Paper Tray].
■ Cases When the Standard Tray
Padding Covers Are Not Necessary
When the size of the paper is less than A4 vertically or
more than A3, or when using envelopes of the C5 or DL-
LEF size, remove the standard tray padding cover. The
paper feed guide cannot be moved while the cover is in
place.

8-10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 High Capacity Feeder

When Setting a Large Amount Adding the Paper

of Paper at Once
Use the standard tray descent button when adding

1 Spread the paper feed guides and

load approximately 500 sheets onto
the paper. The position to which the standard tray
is lowered will differ depending on how the
standard tray descent button is operated. Note that
the standard tray. the standard tray is automatically lowered when all
paper is removed.

2 Adjust the paper feed guides so that

they are suitable for the paper size.
Move the guides against the edges of the paper, and
1 Press the standard tray descent
button to lower the standard tray.
release the lever to lock. Hold down the standard tray descent button.
The standard tray will keep lowering for as long as

3 Load the rest of the paper.

Procedures after all of the paper has been loaded
the button is being pressed. Hold the button down
until the tray reaches the desired position.

are the same as when loading the paper for normal

Press and quickly release the standard tray
operation. Perform step 4 and 5 described in
"Loading the Paper" (p. 8-9). descent button.
The standard tray will be lowered to a certain
position.

• The position to which the standard tray is

lowered when the standard tray descent button
is pressed or when paper runs out is set by the
administrator. Contact your administrator for
details.

• When the standard tray is lowered to the

lowermost position, it is possible to load a large
amount of paper at once but this will require that
8
you squat when loading the paper. To load the
paper while standing or when it is rare that you
need to load a large amount of paper at once,
avoid lowering the standard tray to the
lowermost position.

• The position to which the standard tray is

lowered can be conveniently configured to suit
scenes of use. To change the position to which
the standard tray is lowered, contact your
administrator.

8-11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

2 Add the Paper.

When Adding a Large Amount

of Paper
It is possible to set a greater amount of paper at
once by holding down the standard tray descent
button and lowering the standard tray to its
lowermost position.

• The position to which the standard tray is

lowered when the standard tray descent button
is pressed shortly or when paper runs out is set
by the administrator. To change the position to
which the standard tray is lowered, contact your
administrator.

8-12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Stacking Tray (Auto-control Stacking Tray / Wide Stacking Tray)

The auto-control stacking tray and wide stacking

tray are available as optional stacking trays. Loading the Stacking
• With the auto-control stacking tray, the paper guides
adjust automatically to fit the paper size.
Tray
• With the wide stacking tray, move the paper guides
(side and end) to match the paper size. Follow the procedure below to load the stacking
tray. Depending on the paper size or type, you can
The auto-control stacking tray is shown in the also adjust the paper arranger at this time.
illustrations below.
• The auto-control stacking tray is shown in the
illustrations below.

• When using the wide stacking tray, manually

adjust the positions of the paper guides (side
and end) to match the paper size.

1 Open the stacking tray in the

direction of the arrow until it stops.

A Paper Arrangers
Set to suit the paper type so that the output paper is
neatly aligned.
B Paper Guide (side)
C Paper Guide (end)
Use to prevent output paper in the stacking tray from
becoming misaligned. 2 Lift the paper guides (side) to stand
them upright.
D Paper Guides Open Button
(Auto-control stacking tray only)
Use to spread the paper guides apart. Operation varies
depending on whether paper is present or not. 8
• When the machine is idle and there is no paper in the
stacking tray, the guides open to the loading position.
• When the machine is idle and there is paper in the
stacking tray, the paper guides spread apart, making it
easy to remove the paper. The administrator can
configure which paper guides spread apart when the
button is pressed.

8-13

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

3 Adjust the paper arranger.

Normally, the paper arranger should be extended Closing the Stacking Tray
when printing on paper that is B4 size or smaller.
How paper is stacked after printing varies depending
on stiffness and other factors. Adjust the paper 1 After confirming that there are no
printouts in the stacking tray, press
arranger as needed.
the paper guides open button.
The paper guides (side and end) now move into
position for storage.

4 Lift the paper guide (end) to stand it

upright.

2 Lower the paper guide (end) toward

the stacking tray to fold it up.

• Fold all paper guides when printing on paper

larger than 320 mm × 432 mm (12 19/32" ×
17").

8-14

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Stacking Tray (Auto-control Stacking Tray / Wide Stacking Tray)

3 Fold up the paper arranger. List of Settings

The items described below can be set when the
stacking tray is connected.

Printer Driver

Setting
Use this item to: See
item
[Finishing] Tab
Output Specify the output tray. p. 8-16
Tray
4 Lower the paper guides (side)
inward, and then close the stacking
Output
Tray Relay
Switch the output tray
automatically when the
p. 8-16

tray. output tray becomes full.

Copy Mode

Setting
Use this item to: See
item
Output Specify the output tray. p. 8-16
Tray
Face Up/ Specify whether to stack p. 8-16
Down the pages face up or face
down in the stacker.
Output Switch the output tray p. 8-17
Tray Relay automatically when the
output tray becomes full.

Maintenance Mode

Setting
item
Use this item to: See 8
Paper Adjust the position of the p. 9-3
Guide paper guides of the auto-
Control control stacking tray.

8-15

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Printer Driver Settings Copy Mode Settings

Output Tray Output Tray

Specify the output tray for printouts. Select the output tray for printouts.
When [Auto] is specified, printouts are output to the
appropriate tray automatically based on the • The tray details displayed on the [Output Tray]
configured functions. To output printouts to the screen vary depending on the optional
stacking tray, select [Auto-control Stacking Tray] or equipment that is connected.
[Wide Stacking Tray].
[Auto]
Click [Details] to display the [Output Tray] dialog box. The appropriate tray is selected automatically.
Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face down [A Face Down Tray], [B Auto-Control Stacking Tray]
in the stacker. or [B Wide Stacking Tray]
[Face Up], [Face Down] Select the output tray.

Output Tray Relay 1 Touch [Output Tray].

The output tray switches automatically when the
tray is full.
2 Select the output tray.
You must set [Sort] to [Uncollated] in the [Basic]
tab. 3 Touch [OK].
• This setting is not available when using the wide
stacking tray. Face Up/Down
• [Output Tray Relay] and [Add Cover] cannot be Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face
used at the same time. (p. 3-23 "Add Cover") down in the stacker.

[Face Up], [Face Down]

8-16

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Stacking Tray (Auto-control Stacking Tray / Wide Stacking Tray)

Output Tray Relay Maintenance Mode

When using the auto-control stacking tray, the Settings
output tray switches automatically when the tray
that is being used becomes full.
Paper Guide Control
1 Touch [Output Tray Relay].
Adjust the position of the paper guide when using
the auto-control stacking tray. For more
2 Touch [ON]. information, see "Paper Guide Control" (p. 9-3) in
the "Appendix".

3 Touch [OK].
• This setting is not available when using the wide
stacking tray.

• When [Output Tray Relay] is configured, [Sort]

is set to [Uncollated]. (p. 1-11 "Sort")

• [Output Tray Relay], [Booklet], and [Add Cover]

cannot be used at the same time. (p. 1-16
"Booklet", p. 1-27 "Add Cover")

8-17

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 High Capacity Stacker

By connecting the high capacity stacker, it is possible to output approximately 4,000 sheets of printing paper
(when using plain paper, recycled paper).
The printouts that have been output can be removed at once with the dedicated carriage.

A Stacking Tray Descent Button E Carriage

Press this button to remove printouts from the stacking Set this dedicated carriage inside the high capacity
tray. If you press the stacking tray descent button, the stacker. Connect the stacking tray to the carriage to
stacking tray lowers to the bottom (the position of the transport high-volume printouts.
carriage). The stacking tray stops when you press the F Stacking Tray
stacking tray descent button during lowering. If you press Printouts are output to this tray.
the button again, the stacking tray continues lowering. G Left Cover
The stacking tray does not operate during printing even if If a paper jam occurs while paper is being transported,
you press the stacking tray descent button. Press with open this cover and remove the jammed paper.
the right and left covers closed.
H High Capacity Stacker Socket
B Right Cover Connect the high capacity stacker power cord. The
Open this cover when removing printouts, setting the socket is located toward the bottom on the rear of the left
carriage in position, or when removing paper jams. cover.
C Paper Guide
Use this guide to prevent printouts that have been output
• Do not open the cover during printing. You
from becoming misaligned.
cannot print with the cover open.
D Corrugators
Set the corrugators to feed paper smoothly according to • Be sure to use the dedicated carriage with the
the paper type and align printouts to stack neatly. high capacity stacker.

8-18

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 High Capacity Stacker

Setting the Corrugators Lowering the Corrugators

The unit is used with the corrugators lowered when
As the state of paper transport and alignment will
printing on A3/B4/B5-LEF paper or thin paper.
differ depending on the size or type of paper being
used, adjust the corrugators so that the output and
paper of printouts will be aligned.
1 Lower the front corrugator while
pressing it toward the machine (to
• Normally, it will not be necessary to adjust the the left).
corrugators for printing. Adjust the corrugators
for better feeding and printout alignment.

• Paper alignment may not improve according to

the paper size, paper type, environment and
storage. For more information, contact your
dealer or authorized service representative.

Raising the Corrugators

Normally, the unit is used with the corrugators
raised.
2 Similarly lower the back corrugator
while pressing it toward the machine
1 Lift the front corrugator while
pressing it toward the machine (to
(to the left).

the left).
Removing Printouts
Remove printouts from the high capacity stacker.
There are two ways of removing the printouts.

• The printouts are to be removed when the

stacking tray is at a full stop. A message
indicating the status of the stacking tray is
displayed on the operation panel. Follow the
message.

2 Similarly lift the back corrugator

while pressing it toward the machine
• When removing printouts with the carriage
Remove printouts using the dedicated carriage for 8
(to the left). the high capacity stacker.
• When removing only the printouts
Printouts can be removed without pulling out the
dedicated carriage. You can remove printouts
without waiting for the stacking tray to lower to the
bottom.

8-19

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

When Removing Printouts With 3 Pull out the carriage along with the
stacking tray on it.
the Carriage
• Slowly pull out the carriage while holding its

1 Press the stacking tray descent

button.
handle. Abruptly moving the cart may cause the
printouts to collapse.

The stacking tray will be automatically lowered to its

lowermost position after approximately 3,200 to
4,000 (full) sheets have been output.

4 Remove printouts from the carriage.

5 Return the carriage to the high
capacity stacker.
• Press the stacking tray descent button in a state
where the covers on both sides of the high
• Be sure to return the carriage in a state where
capacity stacker are closed. The stacking tray
the stacking tray has been set.
will not operate if the covers are open.

• Once printing has ended, the stacking tray will

be automatically lowered to a position
configured by the administrator. To change the
position to which the stacking tray is lowered,
contact your administrator.

• If you accidentally press the stacking tray

descent button while printing, be sure to remove
the printouts. In a state where printouts exist on
the tray, the unit will not be capable of raising
the stacking tray to the position for output.

6 Close the right cover of the high

2 Open the right cover of the high
capacity stacker.
capacity stacker.

8-20

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 High Capacity Stacker

When Removing Only the 3 Close the right cover of the high
capacity stacker.
Printouts
• If the carriage has been pulled out in step 2,

1 Open the right cover of the high

capacity stacker.
close the right cover after setting the carriage
back into the high capacity stacker.

• When configured so that the stacking tray is not

lowered even after printing has ended, if there is
paper on the stacking tray, the output guide is
unable to move and may not be able to support
the size of paper for the next job. Before printing
jobs of different paper sizes, paper orientations,
or paper tray settings, be sure to remove the
paper on the stacking tray.

• The position at which the stacking tray will stop

is configured by the administrator. To change
the position to which the tray is lowered, contact
your administrator.

• Depending on the position at which the stacking

tray will stop, the printouts may interfere with the
guides making it difficult to be removed. In such
case, close the right cover, press the stacking
tray descent button, and remove the printouts
after the stacking tray has been lowered.

2 Remove the printouts.

• Depending on the size of the paper that has

been output, the printouts may interfere with the
handle of the carriage making it difficult to be
removed. In such case, close the right cover,
press the stacking tray descent button, and
lower the stacking tray to the carriage. This will
allow you to pull out the entire carriage and
remove the paper.

8-21

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Setting the Stacking Tray List of Settings

on the Carriage The items described below can be set when the
high capacity stacker is connected.
The stacking tray can be removed from the
carriage. When you have removed the stacking tray
to remove printouts, set the stacking tray on the
carriage and return the high capacity stacker Printer Driver
together with the carriage.
Setting item Use this item to: See

1 Align the end of the stacking tray

with the two screws at the base of
[Finishing] tab
Offset Output Stack sets of printed p. 8-23
the handle on the carriage. documents slightly
apart from one another
when printing multiple
copies.
Output Tray Specify the output tray. p. 8-23
Output Tray Switch the output tray p. 8-24
Relay automatically when the
output tray becomes
full.
[Advanced] Tab
Program Specify the number of p. 3-28
copies by group (such

2 Set
as corporate division or
the carriage by inserting its
class).
protrusions into the holes in the
Offset Stack sets of printed p. 8-24
stacking tray. Output documents slightly
(Program) apart from one another
to create separation.

• When [Offset Output] and [Output Tray] are

grayed out on the [Finishing] tab, make sure
that [Printer Configuration] on the [Environment]
tab has been configured correctly. (p. 3-32
"Printer Configuration")

8-22

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 High Capacity Stacker

Copy Mode Printer Driver Settings

Setting item Use this item to: See
Program Specify the number of p. 1-24 Offset Output
copies by group (such
as corporate division or Stack sets of printed documents slightly apart from
class). one another when printing multiple copies.
Offset Stack sets of printed p. 8-24
Output documents slightly • When [Program] is configured, [Offset Output] is
([Program]) apart from one another [OFF]. (p. 3-28 "Program")
to create separation.
• This setting is not available for paper sizes that
Separation Specify where to insert p. 1-27 cannot be output to the high capacity stacker.
slip sheets between
printouts. • When [Mixed Size Original] is configured,
[Offset Output] is [OFF]. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size
Offset Output Stack sets of printed p. 8-24 Original")
([Separation]) documents slightly
apart from one another
[OFF]
to create separation.
Offset output is not performed.
Output Tray Specify the output tray. p. 8-25
[Between Sorts]
Face Up/ Specify whether to p. 8-25 Sets of printed documents specified in [Sort] are stacked
Down stack the pages face up slightly apart from one another.
or face down in the
[Between Jobs]
stacker.
Finished print jobs are stacked slightly apart from one
Output Tray Switch the output tray p. 8-25
another.
Relay automatically when the
output tray becomes
full.
Output Tray
Maintenance Mode Specify the output tray for printouts.
When [Auto] is specified, printouts are output to the
appropriate tray automatically based on the
Setting item Use this item to: See configured functions. Select [High Capacity
Paper Guide Adjust the position of p. 9-3 Stacker] to output materials to the high capacity
Control the paper guides of the stacker.
auto-control stacking
tray. Click [Details] to display the [Output Tray] dialog box.
Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face down
in the stacker. 8
[Face Up], [Face Down]

• When [Offset Output] or [Staple] is configured,

the output trays that can be selected with
[Output Tray] will differ depending on the
configured details. (p. 8-34 "Offset Output",
p. 8-28 "Staple")

8-23

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Output Tray Relay Offset Output ([Separation])

The output tray switches automatically when the In addition to the "Separation" (p. 1-27) function for
tray is full. copying, you can stack sets of printed documents
You must set [Sort] to [Uncollated] in the [Basic] slightly apart from one another to create
tab. separation.

• You cannot use [Offset Output] and [Mixed Size

Original] at the same time. (p. 1-13 "Mixed Size
Offset Output (Program) Original")

In addition to the "Program" (p. 3-28) function for

printouts, you can stack sets of printed documents [OFF]
slightly apart from one another to create Offset output is not performed.
separation. [Between Sorts]
[OFF] Each sorted set is stacked slightly apart from one
another.
Offset output is not performed.
[After a Job]
[Between Sets]
Each print job is stacked slightly apart from one another.
Each set of printed documents is stacked slightly apart
from one another.
Paper sizes that can be offset
[Between Groups] • A3, B4, A4, A4-LEF, B5, B5-LEF, Ledger, Legal,
Groups of printed documents are stacked slightly apart Letter, Letter-LEF, Foolscap, Specified Size
from one another. (length of paper between 182 mm (7 3/16") to
432 mm (17"))

Copy Mode Settings 1 Touch [Separation].

Offset Output ([Program])
2 Select the offset output setting.
In addition to the "Program" (p. 1-24) function for 3 Touch [OK].
copying, you can stack sets of printed documents
slightly apart from one another to create
separation.

[OFF]
Offset output is not performed.
[Between Sets]
Each set of printed documents is stacked slightly apart
from one another.
[Between Groups]
Groups of printed documents are stacked slightly apart
from one another.

8-24

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 High Capacity Stacker

Output Tray Maintenance Mode

Select the output tray for printouts. Settings
• The tray details displayed on the [Output Tray]
screen vary depending on the optional Paper Guide Control
equipment that is connected.
Adjust the position of the paper guides. For more
[Auto]
information, see "Paper Guide Control" (p. 9-3) in
The appropriate tray is selected automatically.
the "Appendix".
[A Face Down Tray], [B High Capacity Stacker]
Select the output tray.

1 Touch [Output Tray].

2 Select the output tray.
3 Touch [OK].
Face Up/Down
Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face
down in the stacker.

[Face Up], [Face Down]

Output Tray Relay

The output tray switches automatically when the
tray that is being used becomes full.

1 Touch [Output Tray Relay].

2 Touch [ON]. 8
3 Touch [OK].
• [Output Tray Relay], [Booklet], and [Add Cover]
cannot be used at the same time. (p. 1-16
"Booklet", p. 1-27 "Add Cover")

8-25

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

You can do the following when using the optional multifunction finisher.

Functions Available for Multifunction Functions Available When the Folder

Finisher Unit is Installed
Staple/Punch Inner tri-fold
Bi-fold Outer tri-fold
Booklet binding Z-fold

A Top Tray G Eject Button

When using the punching function, printouts will be Use this button to move the printouts in the booklet tray
output here. to the position where you can easily retrieve them.
B Stacking Tray H Folder Unit
When using the staple, offset output, or punching Outer tri-fold, inner tri-fold, and Z-fold functions are
function, printouts will be output here. available.
C Booklet Tray I Tri-fold Output Tray Button
Booklets and bi-folded printouts will be output here. Press this button to remove tri-folded printouts. The tri-
D Right Cover fold tray will open towards the front.
Open this cover when replacing the staple cartridge or J Multifunction Finisher Socket
when a paper jam has occurred. Connect the multifunction finisher power code. The
E Left Cover socket is located in the rear of the multifunction finisher.
Open this cover to remove the jammed paper from the
paper feed path between the printer and the finisher.
F Tri-fold Output Tray
Tri-folded printouts will be output here.

8-26

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

List of Settings Copy Mode

You can do the following when the multifunction Setting item Use this item to: See
finisher is connected.
Booklet Configure the page p. 1-16
assignment and folding
when creating a
Printer Driver booklet.
Binding Fold the paper in half p. 8-35
([Booklet]) and bind in the center
Setting item Use this item to: See with a staple.
[Finishing] tab Separating Specify whether to bind p. 8-36
Staple Select the stapling p. 8-28 Books a bundle of volumes
position. ([Booklet]) either flat or in the
center.
Punch Specify the punch p. 8-30
position. Center Specify a margin in the p. 8-36
Margin center of the folded
Fold Specify the fold of the p. 8-30 ([Booklet]) portion.
printing paper.
Program Specify the number of p. 1-24
Booklet Specify the binding p. 8-32 copies by group (such
Binding method. as corporate division or
Offset Output Stack sets of printed p. 8-34 class).
documents slightly Offset Stack sets of printed p. 8-36
apart from one another Output documents slightly
when printing multiple ([Program]) apart from one another
copies. to create separation.
Output Tray Specify the output tray. p. 8-35 Separation Specify where to insert p. 1-27
Output Tray Switch the output tray p. 8-35 slip sheets between
Relay automatically when the printouts.
output tray becomes Offset Output Stack sets of printed p. 8-37
full. ([Separation]) documents slightly
[Advanced] Tab apart from one another
to create separation.
Program Specify the number of p. 3-28
copies by group (such Staple/Punch Specify the staple and p. 8-37
as corporate division or punch settings.
class). Fold Specify how the paper p. 8-39
Offset Stack sets of printed p. 8-35 is folded as well as the
Output documents slightly direction thereof.
(Program) apart from one another Output Tray Specify the output tray. p. 8-41
to create separation. 8
Face Up/ Specify whether to p. 8-41
Down stack the pages face up
• When [Staple] or [Punch] is grayed out in the or face down in the
[Finishing] tab, make sure that [Printer stacker.
Configuration] on the [Environment] tab has
Output Tray Switch the output tray p. 8-41
been configured correctly. (p. 3-32 "Printer
Relay automatically when the
Configuration")
output tray becomes
full.

8-27

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Types of paper that can be stapled

Printer Driver Settings • Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF,
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-LEF, Foolscap,
Custom size

Staple
203 mm -
Select the stapling position. 297 mm
(8" -
11 11/16") Paper feed
• When [Staple] is configured, make sure to
configure [Binding Edge]. and output
direction
• When [Staple] is configured, [Sort] is set to 182 mm - 432 mm
(7 3/16" - 17")
[Collated]. (p. 3-10 "Sort")

• When [Mixed Size Original] is configured, • Paper weight: 52 g/m2 - 210 g/m2
[Staple] is [OFF]. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size Original") (14-lb bond - 56-lb bond)
• When [Booklet] or [Booklet Binding] is When the paper weight exceeds 162 g/m2
configured, [Staple] is [OFF]. To bind booklets (43-lb bond), only one sheet can be stapled for
in the center, set [Booklet Binding] to [Fold + the cover.
Staple]. (p. 3-16 "Booklet", p. 8-32 "Booklet
Number of sheets that can be stapled
Binding")
• When using standard size paper
• The [Staple] and [Output Tray Relay] functions A4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF (Letter, Letter-LEF):
cannot be used at the same time. (p. 8-35 2 to 100 sheets
"Output Tray Relay") Sizes other than the above (A3, B4 (ledger,
Legal)): 2 to 65 sheets
• The orientation of the paper varies depending • When using custom size paper
on the binding edge. See "Staple Function and When the paper is longer than 297 mm
Loading Orientation of the Paper" (p. 8-29). (11 11/16"): 2 to 65 sheets
When the paper is both wider and longer than
216 mm (8 1/2"): 2 to 65 sheets
If you select [Left] or [Right] for [Binding Edge], select
Non-standard size paper other than the above: 2
from the following options:
to 100 sheets
[OFF], [1 Staple], [2 Staples]
If you select [Top] for [Binding Edge], select from the
following options:
[OFF], [Left 1 Staple], [Right 1 Staple], [2 Staples]

Paper feed
Left 1 Staple Right 1 Staple and output
2 Staples direction
297 mm (11 11/16")
1 Staple 1 Staple

• When a job exceeding the maximum number of

sheets that can be stapled is printed, the
printouts will be output without being stapled.

2 Staples 2 Staples

Binding edge

8-28

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

Staple Function and Loading Orientation of the Paper

The orientation in which to load the paper in the paper tray (standard tray) and the stapling position are as
listed below.

Orientation: Portrait Orientation: Landscape Face up data Face down data

Staple

Binding
Staple position
edge
1 Staple 2 Staples

Left

1 Staple 2 Staples

Right

Left 1 Staple Right 1 Staple 2 Staples

Top

Paper
transfer Paper feed and
output direction

• When paper of the corresponding size is not loaded in the tray, a message will appear.
Follow the displayed instructions and load the tray with paper.

• For [1 Staple], depending on the paper size and loaded direction, the angle of the staple may differ from the
above drawing or the printing image shown on the printer driver screen.

8-29

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Punch Fold
Specify the number of holes to punch. Select the folding type such as bi-fold or Z-fold.

• When [Mixed Size Original] is configured, • [Fold] cannot be used together with [Booklet],
[Punch] is [OFF]. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size Original") [Multi-part Paper Printing], or [Booklet Binding].
(p. 3-16 "Booklet", p. 3-30 "Multi-part Paper
• When [Booklet] is configured, [Punch] is [OFF].
Printing", p. 8-32 "Booklet Binding")
(p. 3-16 "Booklet")
• [Bi-fold], [Inner Tri-fold], and [Outer Tri-fold]
• When [Booklet Binding] is configured, [Punch] is
cannot be used together with [Mixed Size
[OFF]. (p. 8-32 "Booklet Binding")
Original], [Binding Edge], [Slip Sheet], [Add
Cover], [Program], [Blank Page Detection],
[OFF], [2 Holes], [3 Holes], [4 Holes] [Staple], [Punch], [Offset Output], and [Output
Tray Relay]. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size Original",
p. 3-20 "Binding Edge", p. 3-22 "Slip Sheet",
• The number of holes that can be punched
p. 3-23 "Add Cover", p. 3-28 "Program", p. 3-30
varies depending on the connected finisher.
"Blank Page Detection", p. 8-28 "Staple",
p. 8-30 "Punch", p. 8-34 "Offset Output", p. 8-35
Binding on the left Binding on the right "Output Tray Relay")

Types of Paper that can be folded

• Paper size:
Bi-fold: A3, B4, A4, Ledger, Legal, Letter,
Foolscap, Custom size
2 holes 4 holes 2 holes 4 holes Inner Tri-fold, Outer Tri-fold: A4, Letter
Binding at the top Z-fold: A3, B4, Ledger
Binding edge

210 mm -
The illustrations 330 mm
are the examples (8 1/4" -
of 2-hole and 13")
2 holes 4 holes 4-hole punches. Paper feed
and output
direction
Types of Paper that can be punched 280 mm - 457 mm
(11" - 18")
• Paper size:
2 holes: A3, B4, A4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF, Ledger,
Legal, Letter, Letter-LEF • Paper weight: 60 g/m2 - 90 g/m2
3 holes: A3, B4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF, Ledger, (16-lb bond - 24-lb bond)
Letter-LEF
[OFF]
4 holes: A3, A4-LEF, Ledger, Letter-LEF
• Paper weight: 52 g/m2 - 200 g/m2 The paper will not be folded.
(14-lb bond - 53-lb bond) [Bi-fold]
The paper will be folded in two, one sheet at a time.
[Inner Tri-fold]
The paper will be folded inwards in three, one sheet at a
time.
[Outer Tri-fold]
The paper will be folded outwards in three, one sheet at a
time.

8-30

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

[Z-fold] Outer tri-fold

The paper will be folded in the shape of a Z, one sheet at
a time.
When used together with [Mixed Size Original], Z-folded Print Inside Print Outside
paper and non-Z-folded paper are output with mixed.

Select the type of fold and click [Details] to display the

[Fold] dialog box. Configure the folding direction and
binding edge.

■ Fold Direction
When [Bi-fold], [Inner Tri-fold], or [Outer Tri-fold] is
selected, configure whether the printed surface is to be
facing inward or outward. ■ Binding Edge
• When using duplex printing, the first page will When [Z-fold] is selected, configure the binding edge of
be regarded as the printed surface. the paper.
[Bind Left/Top]
[Print Inside] The right half of the paper will be folded in the shape of a
The paper will be folded so that the printed surface is on Z.
the inside. [Bind Right/Bottom]
[Print Outside] The left half of the paper will be folded in the shape of a
The paper will be folded so that the printed surface is on Z.
the outside.
Bi-fold
Bind Left Bind Right

Print Inside Print Outside

Inner tri-fold 8

Print Inside Print Outside

8-31

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

• When [Mixed Size Original] is configured, it is

Booklet Binding
possible to select [Z-fold] only for [Fold]. In this
case, the combinations of original sizes that can
Perform duplex printing of a series of multiple
be mixed are "A4-LEF and A3", "B5-LEF and
pages and create a booklet by bi-folding the paper.
B4", and "Letter-LEF and Ledger". (p. 3-11
"Mixed Size Original")
The booklet can also be bound in the center with a
staple.
• When used together with [Mixed Size Original],
for [Orientation], select the orientation of the
• When [Booklet Binding] is configured, [Sort] is
original that is larger. (When the A4 original is
set to [Collated]. (p. 3-10 "Sort")
vertical and the A3 original is horizontal, select
[Horizontal]) (p. 3-10 "Original Size", p. 3-11 • [Booklet Binding] cannot be used together with
"Mixed Size Original") [Mixed Size Original], [Combine], [Image
Repeat], [Binding Edge], [Slip Sheet],
• For [Paper Size], specify the size of the paper
[Program], [Blank Page Detection], [Multi-part
subject to the Z-fold. (p. 3-11 "Paper Size")
Paper Printing], [Staple], [Punch], [Fold], [Offset
• When using this function with duplex printing, Output], and [Output Tray Relay]. (p. 3-11
duplex printing is only applied when the size of "Mixed Size Original", p. 3-15 "Combine",
the front and back of the document is the same. p. 3-16 "Image Repeat", p. 3-20 "Binding Edge",
(If the size is not the same, the back of the page p. 3-22 "Slip Sheet", p. 3-28 "Program", p. 3-30
is left blank.) (p. 3-9 "Duplex / Simplex") "Blank Page Detection", p. 3-30 "Multi-part
Paper Printing", p. 8-28 "Staple", p. 8-30
• When used together with [Mixed Size Original], "Punch", p. 8-30 "Fold", p. 8-34 "Offset Output",
you can configure the staple, punch, and offset p. 8-35 "Output Tray Relay")
output functions. (p. 3-10 "Original Size",
p. 8-34 "Offset Output", p. 8-28 "Staple", p. 8-30 Types of paper that can be used to create
"Punch")
booklets
• When used together with [Add Cover], the • A3, B4, A4, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Foolscap,
added cover will be the size after the Z-fold. Custom size
(p. 3-23 "Add Cover")

210 mm -
330 mm
(8 1/4" -
13") Paper feed
and output
direction
280 mm - 457 mm
(11" - 18")

[OFF]
Booklet binding will not be configured.
[Fold]
The printing paper will be folded in two.
[Fold + Staple]
The printing paper is folded in half and bound in the
center with a staple.

Select the booklet binding method and click [Details] to

display the [Booklet Binding] dialog box. Configure
separating books, center binding, and separate cover
printing.

8-32

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

■ Separating Books Example: 60 pages, set to [Fold], separating books [ON]

Printouts are output upon being separated per booklet

based on a certain number of pages per volume. The
assignment of pages will differ depending on the settings.
c p. 41 to 60 c
[OFF] b
b p. 21 to 40
The pages will be assigned so that the pages are in order a
a p. 1 to 20
when the booklet is bound in the center. When the data
contains a large number of pages, the booklets will be
output as multiple volumes. The pages will be assigned
so that when these volumes are opened and stacked on
top of each other, they can be bound to form a single
booklet.

[ON] ■ Center Margin

The pages will be assigned so that when all volumes that
Enter a value for [Width].
are output are stacked in their folded state, the pages will
be in the correct order. The volumes will be output per 5 Select the [Auto Reduction] check box to automatically
sheets when [Booklet Binding] is set to [Fold] while they reduce the printed image to fit the paper in cases where
will be output per 15 sheets when this is set to [Fold + the margin width does not allow for the original-scale
Staple]. printed image to fit into the paper.

• In the factory default state, multiple volumes will ■ Booklet Cover

be output when the number of pages exceeds 5
sheets when [Booklet Binding] is set to [Fold] or Print only the cover page (the first two pages and the last
15 sheets when this is set to [Fold + Staple]. two pages of the original) separately. This setting is
convenient for printing the cover and body using different
• The staples will not be inserted when multiple
types of paper.
volumes are being output.

• When [Separating Books] is set to [ON], [OFF]

[Booklet Cover] and [Add Cover] cannot be Cover separated printing is not configured.
used. [Print Cover Only]
The cover page only is printed.
[Print Except Cover]
Example: 60 pages, set to [Fold], separating books [OFF]
The pages other than the cover are printed as a booklet.
[Store Except Cover to Waiting List]
When printing the body pages after printing the cover,
c p. 21 to 30 + p. 31 to 40
place a check in [Store Except Cover to Waiting List] to
b p. 11 to 20 + p. 41 to 50
instruct printing from the operation panel on the machine.
a p. 1 to 10 + p. 51 to 60
In this case, specify the feed tray that is loaded with
8
cover paper.
a b c
[Cover Sheet Tray]
[Standard Tray], [Feed Tray 1], [Feed Tray 2],
[Feed Tray 3]

8-33

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

The example describes a situation where the cover

page only is printed separately and later combined Offset Output
with the body pages for booklet binding.
Stack sets of printed documents slightly apart from
one another when printing multiple copies.
1 Click [Print Cover Only] under
[Booklet Cover]. • When [Program] is configured, [Offset Output] is
[OFF]. (p. 3-28 "Program")

2 Select the [Store Except Cover to

Waiting List] check box.
• This setting is not available for paper sizes that
cannot be output to the stacking tray.

• When [Mixed Size Original] is configured,

3 Select [Cover Sheet Tray]. [Offset Output] is [OFF]. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size
Original")

4 Click [OK].
Only the cover page is printed and main body data
• When [Bi-fold], [Inner Tri-fold], or [Outer Tri-fold]
of [Fold] is configured, [Offset Output] is [OFF].
(p. 8-30 "Fold")
will be listed in a waiting job.
• When [Booklet Binding] is configured, [Offset
Output] is [OFF]. (p. 8-32 "Booklet Binding")
5 Load the printed cover onto the tray
of the machine configured with • Normally when 2-step offset and staple are
used together, this will act as a 3-step offset.
[Cover Sheet Tray]. 2-step Offset
Without staple (multifunction finisher, face down

6 Touch [Print] on the [Home1]

screen.
finisher)

7 Select the job.

8 Press the [Start] key.
The body pages are printed and combined with the
cover for booklet binding. 3-step Offset
With staple (multifunction finisher)

[OFF]
Offset output is not performed.
[Between Sorts]
Sets of printed documents specified in [Sort] are stacked
slightly apart from one another.
[Between Jobs]
Finished print jobs are stacked slightly apart from one
another.

8-34

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

Output Tray Offset Output (Program)

Specify the output tray for printouts. In addition to the "Program" (p. 3-28) function for
When [Auto] is specified, printouts are output to the printouts, you can stack sets of printed documents
appropriate tray automatically based on the slightly apart from one another to create
configured functions. To output printouts to the separation.
multifunction finisher, select [Top Tray] / [Stacking
[OFF]
Tray].
Offset output is not performed.
Click [Details] to display the [Output Tray] dialog box. [Between Sets]
Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face down Each set of printed documents is stacked slightly apart
in the stacker. from one another.
[Face Up], [Face Down] [Between Groups]
Groups of printed documents are stacked slightly apart
• When [Offset Output], [Staple], [Punch], [Fold], from one another.
or [Booklet Binding] is configured, the output
trays that can be selected with [Output Tray] will
differ depending on the configured details.
(p. 8-34 "Offset Output", p. 8-28 "Staple", Copy Mode Settings
p. 8-30 "Punch", p. 8-30 "Fold", p. 8-32 "Booklet
Binding")

Binding ([Booklet])
Output Tray Relay In addition to the "Booklet" (p. 1-16) function for
copying, you can configure the fold and staple
The output tray switches automatically when the when finishing printouts in the form of a booklet.
tray is full.
• When [Binding] is configured, [Sort] is set to
• When [Output Tray Relay] is configured, [Sort] [Collated]. (p. 1-11 "Sort")
is set to [Uncollated]. (p. 3-10 "Sort")
• [Binding] cannot be used together with
• [Output Tray Relay] cannot be used together [Program], [Sort], [Output Tray], [Face Up/
with [Add Cover], [Staple], [Bi-fold], [Inner Tri- Down], or [Output Tray Relay]. (p. 1-24
fold], and [Outer Tri-fold] of [Fold], or [Booklet "Program", p. 1-27 "Separation", p. 8-41
Binding]. (p. 3-23 "Add Cover", p. 8-28 "Staple", "Output Tray", p. 8-41 "Face Up/Down", p. 8-41
p. 8-30 "Fold", p. 8-32 "Booklet Binding") "Output Tray Relay")

[OFF]
Binding will not be configured.
[Fold + Staple] 8
The paper is folded in half and stapled (bound in the
center).
[Fold]
The paper will be folded in two.

8-35

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

• In the factory default state, multiple volumes will

Separating Books ([Booklet])
be output when the number of pages exceeds 5
sheets when [Binding] for [Booklet] is set to
When [Binding] is set to [Fold + Staple] or [Fold] for
[Fold] or 15 sheets when this is set to [Fold +
"Booklet" of copying, you can configure [Separating
Staple].
Books].
Printouts are output upon being separated per • The staples will not be inserted when multiple
booklet based on a certain number of pages per volumes are being output.
volume. The assignment of pages will differ • [Separating Books] and [Add Cover] cannot be
depending on the settings. used at the same time. (p. 1-27 "Add Cover")

[OFF]
The pages will be assigned so that the pages are in order
when the booklet is bound in the center. When the data Center Margin ([Booklet])
contains a large number of pages, the booklets will be
output as multiple volumes. The pages will be assigned Set the center margin to the center of folded
so that when these volumes are opened and stacked on sections to prevent the folded sections from hiding
top of each other, they can be bound to form a single when the sheets are folded in two.
booklet. When [Center Margin] is configured, you can
[ON] configure [Auto Reduction]. If the center margin you
The pages will be assigned so that when all volumes that have specified causes the printed image not to fit
are output are stacked in their folded state, the pages will on the sheet, set automatic reduction to [ON].
be in the correct order.
• The center margin can be configured only when
Example: 60 pages, set to [Fold], separating books [OFF] [Layout Order] is set to other than [OFF] with
[Booklet] for copying and [Fold + Staple] or
[Fold] is selected for [Binding].

c p. 21 to 30 + p. 31 to 40
b p. 11 to 20 + p. 41 to 50
a p. 1 to 10 + p. 51 to 60 Offset Output ([Program])
a b c In addition to the "Program" (p. 1-24) function for
copying, you can stack sets of printed documents
slightly apart from one another to create
separation.

[OFF]
Offset output is not performed.
Example: 60 pages, set to [Fold], separating books [ON] [Between Sets]
Each set of printed documents is stacked slightly apart
from one another.
[Between Groups]
c p. 41 to 60 c Groups of printed documents are stacked slightly apart
b from one another.
b p. 21 to 40
a
a p. 1 to 20

8-36

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

Offset Output ([Separation]) Staple/Punch

In addition to the "Separation" (p. 1-27) function for Staple or punch holes at the specified position.
copying, you can stack sets of printed documents
slightly apart from one another to create • [Staple/Punch] cannot be used together with
separation. [Booklet] and [Page Border]. (p. 1-16 "Booklet",
p. 1-19 "Page Border")
• You cannot use [Offset Output] and [Mixed Size • The [Staple] and [Output Tray Relay] functions
Original] at the same time. (p. 1-13 "Mixed Size cannot be used at the same time. (p. 8-41
Original") "Output Tray Relay")

[OFF] Types of paper that can be stapled

• Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF,
Offset output is not performed.
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-LEF, Foolscap,
[Between Sorts]
Custom size
Each sorted set is stacked slightly apart from one
another.
[After a Job] 203 mm -
297 mm
Each print job is stacked slightly apart from one another. (8" -
11 11/16") Paper feed
Paper sizes that can be offset
and output
• A3, B4, A4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF, Ledger, Legal, direction
Letter, Letter-LEF, Foolscap, Specified Size 182 mm - 432 mm
(203 mm × 182 mm - 297 mm × 488 mm (7 3/16" - 17")
(8" × 7 3/16" - 11 11/16" × 19 3/16"))
• Paper weight: 52 g/m2 - 210 g/m2

1 Touch [Separation]. (14-lb bond - 56-lb bond)

When the paper weight exceeds 162 g/m2
(43-lb bond), only one sheet can be stapled for
2 Select the offset output setting. the cover.

3 Touch [OK].

8-37

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Number of sheets that can be stapled ■ Original Orientation

• When using standard size paper
[Top Side Up]
A4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF (Letter, Letter-LEF):
2 to 100 sheets Select this option when loading originals in an orientation
Sizes other than the above (A3, B4 (Ledger, from which they can be read normally.
Legal)): 2 to 65 sheets [Top Side Left]
• When using custom size paper Select this option when loading originals so that the top
When the paper is longer than 297 mm of the original is aligned with the left edge.
(11 11/16"): 2 to 65 sheets
When the paper is both wider and longer than
216 mm (8 1/2"): 2 to 65 sheets ■ Binding Edge
Custom size paper other than the above: 2 to
100 sheets Select the binding edge of the paper.
Left, Right, Top

■ Staple
Paper feed Select the stapling position.
and output If you select the left or the right for [Binding Edge], select
direction from the following options:
297 mm (11 11/16")
[OFF], 1 staple, 2 staples
If you select the top for [Binding Edge], select from the
• When a job exceeding the maximum number of following options:
sheets that can be stapled is printed, the [OFF], left 1 staple, right 1 staple, 2 staples
printouts will be output without being stapled.

• The left 1 staple and the right 1 staple are

Types of Paper that can be punched displayed only when the top is selected for
• Paper size: [Binding Edge].
2 holes: A3, B4, A4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF, Ledger,

1 Touch [Staple/Punch].
Legal, Letter, Letter-LEF
3 holes: A3, B4, A4-LEF, B5-LEF, Ledger,
Letter-LEF
4 holes: A3, A4-LEF, Ledger, Letter-LEF
• Paper weight: 52 g/m2 - 200 g/m2 2 Configure [Binding Edge].
(14-lb bond - 53-lb bond)
3 Configure [Staple].
4 Touch [OK].

8-38

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

■ Punch
Fold
Specify the number of holes to punch.
[OFF], 2 holes, 3 holes, 4 holes Configure the folding such as bi-fold or Z-fold.

1 Touch [Staple/Punch]. • When [Mixed Size Z-fold] for [Fold] is set to

[ON], this can be used together with [Staple/
Punch]. (p. 8-37 "Staple/Punch")

2 Configure [Binding Edge]. • [Fold] cannot be used together with [Mixed Size
Original], [Booklet], [Page Border], [Binding

3 Configure [Punch]. Margin], or [Face Up/Down]. (p. 1-13 "Mixed

Size Original", p. 1-16 "Booklet", p. 1-19 "Page
Border", p. 1-28 "Binding Margin", p. 8-41 "Face
4 Touch [OK]. Up/Down")

• [Bi-fold], [Inner Tri-fold], and [Outer Tri-fold]

cannot be used together with [Program], [Add
■ Binding Margin Cover], [Separation], [Staple/Punch], and
[Output Tray Relay]. (p. 1-24 "Program", p. 1-27
You can specify the binding margin so that staples or "Add Cover", p. 1-27 "Separation", p. 8-37
punches are not in the printing area. "Staple/Punch", p. 8-41 "Output Tray Relay")

• [Mixed Size Z-fold] cannot be used in

1 Touch [Binding Margin] on the
[Staple/Punch] screen.
combination with [Reproduction Size], [Book
Shadow Erasure], [Page Split], [Combine], or
[Image Repeat]. (p. 1-7 "Reproduction Size",
The [Binding Margin] screen is displayed.
p. 1-13 "Book Shadow Erasure", p. 1-14 "Page
Split", p. 1-15 "Combine", p. 1-16 "Image

2 Specify the binding margin.

• Select [Binding Edge].
Repeat")

Types of paper that can be folded

• Use [ ], [ ], or the numeric keys to enter the
• Paper size:
width.
Bi-fold: A3, B4, A4, Ledger, Legal, Letter,
• If part of the printing area is missing due to the Foolscap, Custom size
binding margin setting, set [Auto Reduction] to Inward Tri-fold, Outward Tri-fold: A4, Letter
[ON]. Z-fold: A3, B4, Ledger

3 Touch [OK]. 210 mm -

330 mm
(8 1/4" -
13") Paper feed
and output
direction
8
280 mm - 457 mm
(11" - 18")

• Paper weight: 60 g/m2 - 90 g/m2

(16-lb bond - 24-lb bond)

8-39

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

[OFF] ■ Bi-fold, Inner Tri-fold, Outer Tri-fold

The paper will not be folded.

1 Touch [Fold].
[Bi-fold]
The paper will be folded in two, one sheet at a time.
[Inner Tri-fold]
The paper will be folded inwards in three, one sheet at a
time.
2 Select the folding type.
[Outer Tri-fold]
The paper will be folded outwards in three, one sheet at a
3 Select [Fold direction].
4 Touch [OK].
time.
[Z-fold]
The paper will be folded in the shape of a Z, one sheet at
a time.
[Fold Direction] ■ Z-fold
Configure whether the printed surface is to be folded to
face inward or outward.

Fold Fold Direction

1 Touch [Fold].
[Bi-fold] 2 Touch [Z-fold].
3 Select [Binding Edge].
[Inner Tri-fold]
4 When the original sizes are mixed,
select [Mixed Size Z-fold].
[Outer Tri-
fold]
5 Touch [OK].
After the confirmation screen is displayed, touch
[OK] and set [Auto Image Rotation] to [OFF].
[Binding Edge]
Specify the binding edge of the paper.

Fold Binding edge

[Z-fold]

[Mixed Size Z-fold]

When set to [ON], of the originals in two types of sizes,
the larger paper is processed with a Z-fold while the
smaller paper is printed without being folded.
The combinations of original sizes that can be mixed with
Z-folds are "A4-LEF and A3", "B5-LEF and B4", and
"Letter-LEF and Ledger".
[Auto Image Rotation]
This rotates the image 90 degrees automatically when
the orientations of the original and paper do not match,
even if the paper size loaded in the tray matches the size
of the loaded original. Normally, this setting is set to [ON].

8-40

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Multifunction Finisher

Output Tray Output Tray Relay

Select the output tray for printouts. The output tray switches automatically when the
tray that is being used becomes full.
• The tray details displayed on the [Output Tray]

1 Touch [Output Tray Relay].

screen vary depending on the optional
equipment that is connected.

[Auto]
The appropriate tray is selected automatically.
2 Touch [ON].
3 Touch [OK].
[A Face Down Tray], [B Top Tray], [C Stacking
Tray]
Select the output tray.
• [Output Tray Relay] cannot be used together

1 Touch [Output Tray]. with [Booklet], [Add Cover], [Staple], or [Bi-fold],

[Inner Tri-fold], and [Outer Tri-fold] of [Fold].
(p. 1-16 "Booklet", p. 1-27 "Add Cover", p. 8-38
2 Select the output tray. "Staple", p. 8-40 "Bi-fold, Inner Tri-fold, Outer
Tri-fold")

3 Touch [OK]. • When [Output Tray Relay] is configured, [Sort]

is set to [Uncollated]. (p. 1-11 "Sort")

Face Up/Down
Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face
down in the stacker.

[Face Up], [Face Down]

• [Face Up/Down] cannot be used together with

[Binding] or [Fold] of [Booklet]. (p. 8-35 "Binding
([Booklet])", p. 8-39 "Fold")

8-41

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

When the PS kit is installed, it becomes possible to

print combinations of variable data such as forms Installing to Windows
and databases for slips, and also print DTP data

1 Load
using PostScript fonts.
the included DVD-ROM in the
This section describes basic printer driver
operations, as well as how to use various functions. computer's DVD-ROM drive.
PS Kit FG10 is not supported in some regions. The installation wizard automatically starts up. If the
installation wizard does not start up, double-click the
• Log in as a user with administrator privilege "Install.exe" file on the DVD-ROM.
(Windows), or as a root user (Mac OS or Linux).

• Close all active applications. 2 Select the desired language in the

pull-down menu and click [OK].

Operating Environment 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to

configure the settings.
The system requirements for activating the
PostScript 3 printer driver are described in the table
below. 4 Click [Finish].
If the printer driver is installed over the existing one,
Memory 1 GB or more the computer restarts.
Windows or Linux: Intel or fully
CPU compatible CPU • If you do not want to restart the computer
Mac OS: Intel CPU now, remove the check mark from the
[Restart now] check box before clicking
2 GB or more free space
Hard disk [Finish].
(Sufficient to operate the OS)
Display 1024 × 768 or greater resolution
5 Remove the DVD-ROM from the
computer.

• Keep the DVD-ROM in a safe place for

future reference.

Uninstalling From Windows

Use the uninstaller to uninstall the printer driver
compatible with PostScript 3.
Uninstall the printer driver in the same way as
described in "Uninstalling the Printer Driver" in the
"Administrator's Guide".

8-42

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

Installing to Mac OS 8 Configure the queue.

1 Load the included DVD-ROM in the
computer's DVD-ROM drive.
Double-click the installation package file on the
DVD-ROM.

2 Click [Continue].
3 Click [Install].
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to
configure the settings.
On the authentication screen, enter values for
[Name] and [Password], and click [Install Software]. On the [Add] screen, click [IP] and enter the IP
address and queue.
• Contact your administrator for [Name] and
Queue: Enter "lp" in lower case characters for the
[Password] information.
queue.
Use: Click [Select Software] to open the [Printer
5 Click [Close]. Software] screen. Select the printer driver you
installed.

6 Remove the DVD-ROM from the

computer.

• Keep the DVD-ROM in a safe place for

future reference.

7 Add a printer.
1 Open the Mac OS startup volume, and open
[Applications] - [System Preferences].
2 Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers & Scanners].
3 Click the [+] button.

8-43

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Setting the Printer 3 Register the folder.

You can register the folder (shared folder or
Configuration personal folder) to save print data on the printer
driver.
When you use the printer for the first time or added
The folder registered here will be displayed in
an option to the machine, you need to set the
[Output] on the [Basic] tab.
printer configuration.
1 Click [Open Printer Utility] on the [Utility] tab.

1 On the [Print & Scan] or [Printers &

Scanners] screen, select ComColor
GD (printer name), then click [Open
Print Que].

2 Click [Setting].
The print que screen of the printer is displayed. You
can check the printer information by clicking each
tab.

The [Utility] screen is displayed.

2 Enter the IP address in [IP address of the
printer].
3 Click [Get Printer Info].

[General] tab: You can check the device name or the

printer driver version.
[Options] tab: You can check and change the option
setting acquired from the printer.
[Supply Levels] tab: You can check the condition of
supplies such as paper or ink.
[Utility] tab: You can set the shared folder, form,
barcode area definition, and color profile.

The shared folder information registered on the

printer is displayed in [Shared folder in the
printer].
4 Select a folder to add to [Register folder] and
click [Add ->].
5 Set the personal folder.
Select [Use Personal folder] when you have a
personal folder.
6 Click [OK].

8-44

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

4 Get the information of form, barcode

area definition, or color profile as Installing to Linux
required.
Printing can be performed from Linux if the PPD file
included on the DVD-ROM is registered to CUPS
for Linux.

• Before installing, make sure that all of the

necessary Linux system settings are properly
configured.

• The procedure for installing to Linux may vary

depending on your Linux environment. The
standard installation procedure is described here.

1 Open the screen for registering a

printer.

2 Configure the printer.

Follow the on-screen instructions to select the
protocol (LPD, LPR, etc.), and enter the IP address
Clicking [Get Printer Info] on each tab acquires the of the printer.
information from the printer.

3 Configure the queue.

Enter "lp" in lower case characters for the queue.
Uninstalling From Mac OS

1 Open the Mac OS startup volume, 4 Select the driver.

Load the included DVD-ROM in the computer's
and open [Applications] - [System DVD-ROM drive, and select the PPD file.
Preferences].

5 Follow the on-screen instructions to

2 Click [Print & Scan] or [Printers &
Scanners].
configure the settings.
Enter the printer name and other required
information.

3 Select the printer you want to delete,

and click the [-] button. 6 Remove the DVD-ROM from the
computer. 8
• Delete the following folder and file from the Mac
OS startup volume as needed: • Keep the DVD-ROM in a safe place for
- The [RISO] folder in [Library] - [Printers]. future reference.
- "RSGD****.ppd" file within [Library] - [Printers]
- [PPDs] - [Contents] - [Resources]

8-45

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Uninstalling the PPD File Printer Driver Settings

1 Open the screen for registering a

printer.
This section describes the items that can be
configured when the PS kit is installed, using the
[Printing Preferences] screen in Windows as an
example.
2 Select the printer icon and delete it.
How to Print

Printing from a Windows

Computer
For more information, see "Overview of Print
Operations" (p. 3-2) in "Printing".

Printing from a Mac

This section describes the basic procedure for
printing from a Mac.

• The screens displayed may vary depending on • When optional equipment is connected, first
the operating system and applications used, as configure the settings in [Printer Configuration]
well as the optional equipment connected. under the [Environment] tab to use certain
functions.
• Some setting items may not be displayed,
depending on how the administrator has • When printing from a Mac, use the standard OS
configured the settings. Contact your settings for [Copies], [Original Size], and
administrator for details. [Orientation].

1 Open the print screen in the

application on the computer.
Select [Print] in the [File] menu.

2 Select the printer.

3 Click [ ].
4 Click [Show Details].
Change the settings.

5 Click [Print] to perform printing.

8-46

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

• Use commas to separate the specified page

[Basic] Tab numbers (1,2,3, etc.), or specify a range of pages
(such as 1-10).
For more information on each setting item, see
• If no tray is specified for a particular page, it is
"[Basic] Tab" (p. 3-9) in "Printing".
printed from the tray specified in the [Paper
Tray] setting.

• When a tray is specified for a page, image

Output processing is performed on the page based on
the paper settings (paper type) for the specified
Specify whether to print the data sent from a tray.
computer, or save it in a folder on this machine.
Form data can also be registered to the machine.
■ Setting Example
[Print]
Prints the data. Specifying a tray for each page when printing a 15-page
[Print & Storage] document
Saves the original data in a folder on the machine and Tray to use Setting values
prints it.
Standard tray or high
[Storage] 1, 5
capacity feeder
Saves the original data in a folder on the machine. In
Feed tray 1 6 - 10
addition, creates a PRN file to use in the Barcode Area
Definition Software. Feed tray 2 11, 13, 15
[Form] Feed tray 3 12
Registers forms.
Pages 1 and 5 are printed from the standard tray or high
For more information, see "Form Overlay" (p. 8-50) in the
capacity feeder, pages 6 through 10 are printed from
[Advanced] tab.
feed tray 1, and pages 11, 13, and 15 are printed from
feed tray 2, page 12 is printed from feed tray 3, and
pages 2 through 4 and 14, none of which have a
Tray Selection Per Page specified tray, are printed from the tray specified in the
[Paper Tray] setting.
You can specify the tray to use for each page.
When the check box is selected, you can specify • [Tray Selection Per Page] cannot be used
which tray to print from, for each page. together with [Mixed Size Original], [Combine],
[Image Repeat], [Booklet], [Image Rotation],
[Standard Tray]
[Add Cover], or [Multi-part Paper Printing].
Specify the pages that are printed from the standard tray. (p. 3-11 "Mixed Size Original", p. 3-15
[Feed Tray 1] "Combine", p. 3-16 "Image Repeat", p. 3-16
Specify the pages that are printed from feed tray 1. "Booklet", p. 3-20 "Rotation", p. 3-23 "Add
[Feed Tray 2] Cover", p. 3-30 "Multi-part Paper Printing") 8
Specify the pages that are printed from feed tray 2. • If you are using the optional face down finisher
[Feed Tray 3] or high capacity stacker, [Tray Selection Per
Specify the pages that are printed from feed tray 3. Page] cannot be used together with [Offset
Output]. (p. 8-6 "Offset Output", p. 8-23 "Offset
Output")

• If you are using the optional face down finisher,

[Tray Selection Per Page] cannot be used
together with [Fold], [Booklet Binding], or [Offset
Output]. (p. 8-30 "Fold", p. 8-32 "Booklet
Binding", p. 8-34 "Offset Output")

8-47

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

[Favorites] Tab [Finishing] Tab

For more information on each setting item, see For more information on each setting item, see
"[Favorites] Tab" (p. 3-14) in "Printing". "[Finishing] Tab" (p. 3-20) in "Printing".

• For more information on the following function

when using the face down finisher, see "Face
[Layout] Tab Down Finisher" (p. 8-2):
[Staple], [Offset Output]
For more information on each setting item, see
• For more information on the following function
"[Layout] Tab" (p. 3-15) in "Printing".
when using the stacking tray, see "Stacking
Tray (Auto-control Stacking Tray / Wide
• The [Watermark] setting is not available with the
Stacking Tray)" (p. 8-13):
PostScript printer driver.
[Output Tray], [Output Tray Relay]

• For more information on the following function

when using the high capacity stacker, see "High
Image Shift Capacity Stacker" (p. 8-18):
[Offset Output], [Output Tray], [Output Tray
Adjust the printing position of images.
Relay]

• You can adjust the printing position a maximum • For more information on the following function
of ±254 mm (10") up, down, left, or right, in when using the multifunction finisher, see
increments of 0.1 mm (0.004"). "Multifunction Finisher" (p. 8-26):
[Staple], [Punch], [Fold], [Offset Output], [Output
• When performing duplex printing, the front and
Tray], [Output Tray Relay]
back sides can be adjusted separately.
• [Mail Making] is not available with the PostScript
Select the [Image Shift] check box and click [Details] to printer driver when using the Wrapping
display the [Image Shift] dialog box. Enter a value in the Envelope Finisher.
box for the direction that you want to adjust.
• [Perfect Binding] is not available with the
PostScript printer driver when using the Perfect
[Front Side], [Back Side]
Binder.
Enter a value for [Horizontal] or [Vertical].
[Reset]
Resets the entered value to 0 on the front or back side
separately. Booklet Binding
Preview
Perform duplex printing of a series of multiple
You can preview the adjusted image position on the front
pages and create a booklet by bi-folding the paper.
or back side separately.
The booklet can also be bound in the center with a
staple. For more information on booklet binding,
see "Booklet Binding" (p. 8-32) in "Optional
Equipment".

Select the booklet binding method and click [Details] to

display the [Booklet Binding] dialog box.

• [Booklet Binding] cannot be used with [Tray

Selection per Page], [Form Overlay], and
[Reverse Order] at the same time. (p. 8-47 "Tray
Selection Per Page", p. 8-50 "Form Overlay",
p. 8-54 "Reverse Order")

8-48

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

■ Separating Books
Printouts are output upon being separated per booklet
[Image] Tab
based on a certain number of pages per volume. The
imposition will differ depending on the settings. For more information on each setting item, see
"[Image] Tab" (p. 3-24) in "Printing".
[OFF]
The pages will be imposed so that the pages are in order • [Data Compression] in [Image Quality] is not
when the booklet is bound in the center. When the data available with the PostScript printer driver.
contains a large number of pages, the booklets will be
output as multiple volumes. The pages will be imposed
so that when these volumes are opened and stacked on Gamma Correction
top of each other, they can be bound to form a single
booklet. Adjust the brightness, contrast, and gamma value
of cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and gray.
[Auto]
The pages will be imposed so that when all volumes that Select the [Gamma Correction] check box and click
are output are stacked in their folded state, the pages will [Details] to display the [Gamma Correction] dialog box.
be in the correct order. The volumes will be output per 5
sheets when [Booklet Binding] is set to [Fold] while they [Brightness]
will be output per 15 sheets when this is set to [Fold + The smaller the value, the brighter (more whitish) the
Staple]. color. The larger the value, the darker (more blackish) the
[1 Sheet], [2 Sheets], [3 Sheets], [4 Sheets], [5 color.
Sheets], [6 Sheets], [7 Sheets], [8 Sheets], [9 Sheets], Specify a value between -2 and +2.
[10 Sheets], [11 Sheets], [12 Sheets], [13 Sheets], [14 [Contrast]
Sheets], [15 Sheets] Adjusts the ratio of brightness to darkness. The smaller
When [Booklet] is set to [OFF], you can configure per the value, the lower the contrast. The larger the value,
how many sheets the volumes will be separated. the higher the contrast.
Printouts are output upon being separated per booklet Specify a value between -2 and +2.
based on the configured number of pages. [Cyan], [Magenta], [Yellow], [Black], [Gray]
The pages per volume can be set in the range of being Corrects the gamma value of each color.
output per 1 to 5 sheets when [Booklet Binding] is set to The smaller the value, the lighter the color. The larger the
[Fold] or a range of being output per 1 to 15 sheets when value, the deeper the color. When you set the value to
this is set to [Fold + Staple]. 1.00, the gamma value is not corrected and the color
does not change.
• In the factory default state, multiple volumes will Specify a value between 0.01 and 3.00.
be output when the number of pages exceeds 5
sheets when [Booklet Binding] is set to [Fold] or
• Make your color adjustments based on the
15 sheets when this is set to [Fold + Staple].
advice of the administrator.
• The staples will not be inserted when multiple 8
volumes are being output.

• When [Separating Books] is set to other than

[OFF], [Booklet Cover] and [Add Cover] cannot
be used.

8-49

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

■ Max Drops
Color Profile
You can manually set the maximum number of drops for
Use a color profile to perform color management. the ink.

• [Color Profile] and [Print Density] cannot be • When [Max Drops] is set to [Auto], the number
used at the same time. (p. 3-24 "Print Density") of drops is automatically configured based on
the paper type. Normally, use [Auto].

Select the [Color Profile] check box and click [Details] to

display the [Color Profile] dialog box.
[Advanced] Tab
■ Output Profile
For more information on each setting item, see
You can select [Auto] or any output profile that has been "[Advanced] Tab" (p. 3-28) in "Printing".
added.
• The [Program] and [Blank Page Detection]
• When [Auto] is selected, the output profile is settings are not available with the PostScript
automatically configured based on the paper printer driver.
type and resolution settings.
• [Color Profile] is not displayed on the [Version]
screen of the PostScript printer driver.

■ Rendering Intent
Use a color conversion method to perform color
replacement when different colors are expressed by
Form Overlay
combinations of numerical values.
You can select a form that has been registered to
Select one of four different color conversion methods to
the machine, and overlay it on the output data for
perform color replacement.
printing.
[Perceptual]
Preserves the visual relationship between colors, so that Select the [Form Overlay] check box and click [Details] to
colors that appear natural to the human eye. display the [Form Overlay] dialog box. Configure the
• This method is useful when the image data includes settings for overlaying the form.
many out-of-gamut colors that cannot be printed, and
is most suitable for photographic images.
[Saturation]
Produces vivid colors in the image.
• This method is most suitable for graphics such as
charts and graphs, in which bright saturated colors are
important.
[Relative Colorimetric] Output data Form Printed
Compares the extreme highlights of the source color result
space to that of the destination color space, and converts
all colors accordingly. Out-of-gamut colors are converted
to the closest reproducible color in the destination color
space.
• This method preserves more of the original colors in
an image than [Perceptual].
[Absolute Colorimetric]
Preserves the colors that are inside the gamut, and clips
those that are outside the gamut.
• This method is particularly useful for previewing how
paper color affects printed colors.

8-50

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

• Before using these settings, you must first

create the form data on a computer and register
it in [Output] in the [Basic] tab. (p. 8-47 "Output")

• Forms are printed based on the output data

orientation, paper size, and image quality
settings.

• Output data with overlaid forms cannot be

saved (registered).

• You cannot use [Form Overlay] with the [Mixed

Size Original], [Combine], [Image Repeat],
[Booklet], or [Booklet Binding] function. (p. 3-11
"Mixed Size Original", p. 3-15 "Combine",
p. 3-16 "Image Repeat", p. 3-16 "Booklet",
p. 8-32 "Booklet Binding")

■ Print Pattern
Select a form that is saved on the machine, and select
which side of the paper to print it on.
[Print Pattern] [Each Page Overlay]
Specify whether to print the form on the same side as the Prints the form on the same side as the output data.
output data. When performing duplex printing, select [Front/Back
[Print Face] Separately]. When the [Front/Back Separately] check
When [Alternating Overlay (Long Edge)]/[Alternating box is selected, you can select forms for [Form 1] and
Overlay (Short Edge)] or [Each Page + Alternating [Form 2] from the form list.
Overlay (Long Edge)]/[Each Page + Alternating Overlay
(Short Edge)] is selected, specify whether to print the
[Each Page Overlay] with [Front/Back Separately]
form on the front or back. disabled
[Front/Back Separately]
When performing duplex printing, you can specify T
separate forms for the front and back. S
D R
• This setting is available if [Each Page Overlay] C
or [Each Page + Alternating Overlay (Long
B 4

Edge)]/[Each Page + Alternating Overlay (Short

A 2
3

Edge)] is selected in [Print Pattern]. 1

Form 1
Output data
[Form 1]
Select the form to print on the front or both sides of the 8
output data.
[Form 2] R S T R
Select the form to print on the back side of the output
data. A B C D
[Preferred Layer] 1 2 3 4
When [Each Page Overlay], [Each Page + Alternating
Overlay (Long Edge)], or [Each Page + Alternating
Overlay (Short Edge)] is selected, specify whether to
assign priority to the form or the output data.

8-51

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

[Alternating Overlay (Long Edge)]/[Alternating

[Each Page Overlay] with [Front/Back Separately]
Overlay (Short Edge)]
enabled
Prints the form and output data on different sides.
S The form data is printed on the side specified in [Print
R Face]. The output data is printed as variable data on the
other side.

Alternating Overlay (Long Edge)/

D Form 1 Alternating Overlay (Short Edge)*
C
B 4
A 2
3
U S
1 T R
Output data B
A 2
1

Form 2 Output data Form 1

R S For [Print Face]

T U When [Front] is selected
A C
1
B 3
D R S
2 4
Front Back Front Back
1
A 3
B
2 4
Front Back Front Back

When [Back] is selected

R S
A B
1 3
2 4
Front Back Front Back

* The illustration is an example of long edge binding.

8-52

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

[Each Page + Alternating Overlay (Long Edge)]/[Each ■ Print Face

Page + Alternating Overlay (Short Edge)]
When [Alternating Overlay (Long Edge)]/[Alternating
The form is overlaid on the output data on one side, and
Overlay (Short Edge)] or [Each Page + Alternating
a different form is printed on the other side.
Overlay (Long Edge)]/[Each Page + Alternating Overlay
You can specify the separate forms in [Form 1] and
(Short Edge)] is selected in [Print Pattern], specify
[Form 2].
whether to print the form data on the front or back side of
the paper.
Each Page + Alternating Overlay (Long Edge)/
Each Page + Alternating Overlay (Short Edge)*

S
R

D Form 1 Output data Form 1

C
B 4
A 2
3
U
1 T
Output data When [Front] is selected for [Print Face]

Form 2

Front Back

R S When [Back] is selected for [Print Face]

T U
A B
1 3
2 4
Front Back Front Back

Front Back

R S
T U
• When [Each Page + Alternating Overlay (Long
C D Edge)]/[Each Page + Alternating Overlay (Short
Edge)] is selected, specify the side on which to
5
6
7
8 print only the form.
8
Front Back Front Back

* The illustration is an example of long edge binding.

• This function is not available when [Mixed Size

Original] is configured.

• This function is not available when [Combine] is

configured.

8-53

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

■ Preferred Layer
When [Each Page Overlay], [Each Page + Alternating
[Environment] Tab
Overlay (Long Edge)], or [Each Page + Alternating
Overlay (Short Edge)] is selected for [Print Pattern], For more information on each setting item, see
specify whether to assign priority to the form data or the "[Environment] Tab" (p. 3-31) in "Printing".
output data, and overlay it on the other.
• [Default Paper Type of "Any"] and [External
[None]
System Link] are not available with the
The output data and the form data are overlaid.
PostScript printer driver.
[Document]
Priority is given to the output data (original) layer, and it is
overlaid on top of the form data.
[Form] RISO Console Settings
Priority is given to the form data layer, and it is overlaid
on top of the output data. You can use the [Form Data] screen in the
[Storage] menu.
• If the image size of the priority layer is larger
than that of the non-priority layer, the image of
the non-priority layer may not be printed.
[Form Data] Screen
• If the output data and the form data overlap on
the portions having the same color, it might be Displays the form data that have been sent by
difficult to distinguish the image of the selecting [Form] in the [Output] setting of the RISO
assimilated portions. ComColor GD PS Printer Driver.
The RISO ComColor GD PS Printer Driver is
available when the PS kit is installed.
Reverse Order [Delete]
Delete the selected form data from the list.
When the check box is selected, printouts are
[Details]
printed in reverse order.
You can check the settings of the selected form data.
You can also change the settings.
• [Reverse Order] cannot be used together with
[Booklet] or [Booklet Binding]. (p. 3-16
"Booklet", p. 8-32 "Booklet Binding")

8-54

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

Printable Files in the USB

Flash Drive
When the PS kit is installed, you can print PRN files
and PDF files that are saved on a USB flash drive.
The files that can be used are displayed on the
document list screen on the machine.

■ Example of the Folder Structure in a

USB flash Drive

USB flash Drive

The folders are indicated in bold font.

The files inside the rectangles are displayed on the
document list screen.

• The following types of files saved on a USB

flash drive cannot be used: 8
- PDF files that are protected with a password
- PDF files whose job data is broken
- PDF files that are saved in the [RISO_IJ] folder
- PRN files that are saved outside the [RISO_IJ]
folder
- An original that contains high resolution
images or a file with a file size that exceeds
the maximum capacity of the machine

8-55

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

List of Settings in [USB] - [Load]

You can change the print settings for PDF files.
Select the folder on the [USB] - [Load] screen, and touch [Open] to display a list of the documents inside the
folder. When you select a document and touch [Print Setting], the setting screen is displayed. The settings
that can be configured on this screen are listed below.

Setting item Use this item to: See

Color Mode Select color or monochrome printing. p. 1-7
Reproduction Size Specify enlargement or reduction of original images before printing, if p. 1-7
needed.
[Fit to Paper] is not available.
Paper Selection Change the paper tray, paper type, and feed control settings according to p. 1-8
the paper used for printing.
Duplex / Simplex Specify the sides of the paper that are printed on. p. 3-9
Sort Specify the sorting method when printing multiple copies. p. 1-11
Print Density Specify the print density. p. 1-12
Combine Impose continuous pages onto one sheet. p. 1-15
Image Repeat Impose multiple copies of the same original onto one sheet. p. 1-16
Booklet Specify the imposition setting when creating a booklet. You can also bi-fold p. 1-16
the pages and bind them in the center when the optional multifunction
finisher is connected.
Stamp Stamp the page number, date, or text in the header or footer. p. 1-17
Add Cover Add front and back covers to the printout. p. 1-27
Separation Insert slip sheets. When the optional face down finisher, high capacity p. 1-27
stacker, or multifunction finisher is connected, the offset output setting is
also available.
Binding Margin Specify the binding margin. p. 1-28
Staple/Punch Specify the staple settings. p. 8-7
(When using the optional face down finisher)
Specify the staple and punch settings. p. 8-37
(When using the optional multifunction finisher)
Fold* Specify the fold of the printing paper. p. 8-39
(When using the optional multifunction finisher with the folder unit)
Slow Printing Decrease the printing speed. This also reduces the amount of noise p. 1-29
produced by the machine when printing jobs.
Output Tray Select the output tray for printouts.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray / wide stacking tray p. 8-16
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41
Face Up/Down Specify whether to stack the pages face up or face down in the stacker.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray / wide stacking tray p. 8-16
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41

8-56

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

Setting item Use this item to: See

Output Tray Relay Switch the output tray automatically when the output tray becomes full.
When using the optional auto-control stacking tray p. 8-17
When using the optional high capacity stacker p. 8-25
When using the optional multifunction finisher p. 8-41
Auto Image Rotation Rotate the image 90 degrees automatically when the orientation of the p. 1-30
original and paper do not match.

* [Mixed Size Z-fold] under [Fold] cannot be configured.

8-57

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Courier-Oblique
Font List Eurostile
Eurostile-Bold
The fonts you can use are listed below. Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo
Eurostile-ExtendedTwo
Geneva
PS Fonts GillSans
GillSans-Bold
GillSans-BoldCondensed
■ European Fonts GillSans-BoldItalic
AlbertusMT GillSans-Condensed
AlbertusMT-Italic GillSans-ExtraBold
AlbertusMT-Light GillSans-Italic
AntiqueOlive-Bold GillSans-Light
AntiqueOlive-Compact GillSans-LightItalic
AntiqueOlive-Italic Goudy
AntiqueOlive-Roman Goudy-Bold
Apple-Chancery Goudy-BoldItalic
Arial-BoldItalicMT Goudy-ExtraBold
Arial-BoldMT Goudy-Italic
Arial-ItalicMT Helvetica
ArialMT Helvetica-Bold
AvantGarde-Book Helvetica-BoldOblique
AvantGarde-BookOblique Helvetica-Condensed
AvantGarde-Demi Helvetica-Condensed-Bold
AvantGarde-DemiOblique Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl
Bodoni Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique
Bodoni-Bold Helvetica-Narrow
Bodoni-BoldItalic Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
Bodoni-Italic Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
Bodoni-Poster Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
Bodoni-PosterCompressed Helvetica-Oblique
Bookman-Demi HoeflerText-Black
Bookman-DemiItalic HoeflerText-BlackItalic
Bookman-Light HoeflerText-Italic
Bookman-LightItalic HoeflerText-Ornaments
Carta HoeflerText-Regular
Chicago JoannaMT
Clarendon JoannaMT-Bold
Clarendon-Bold JoannaMT-BoldItalic
Clarendon-Light JoannaMT-Italic
CooperBlack LetterGothic
CooperBlack-Italic LetterGothic-Bold
Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC LetterGothic-BoldSlanted
Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC LetterGothic-Slanted
Coronet-Regular LubalinGraph-Book
Courier LubalinGraph-BookOblique
Courier-Bold LubalinGraph-Demi
Courier-BoldOblique LubalinGraph-DemiOblique

8-58

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 PS Kit

Marigold ■ Japanese Fonts

Monaco
IPA Mincho
MonaLisa-Recut
IPA Gothic
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic ■ PCL Fonts
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
Albertus Extra Bold
NewYork
Albertus Medium
Optima
Antique Olive
Optima-Bold
Antique Olive Bold
Optima-BoldItalic
Antique Olive Italic
Optima-Italic
Arial
Oxford
Arial Bold
Palatino-Bold
Arial Bold Italic
Palatino-BoldItalic
Arial Italic
Palatino-Italic
AvantGarde-Book
Palatino-Roman
AvantGarde-BookOblique
StempelGaramond-Bold
AvantGarde-Demi
StempelGaramond-BoldItalic
AvantGarde-DemiOblique
StempelGaramond-Italic
Bookman-Demi
StempelGaramond-Roman
Bookman-DemiItalic
Symbol
Bookman-Light
Tekton
Bookman-LightItalic
Times-Bold
Calibri
Times-BoldItalic
Calibri Bold
Times-Italic
Calibri Bold Italic
Times-Roman
Calibri Italic
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT
Cambria
TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT
Cambria Bold
TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT
Cambria Bold Italic
TimesNewRomanPSMT
Cambria Italic
Univers
CG Omega
Univers-Bold
CG Omega Bold
Univers-BoldExt
CG Omega Bold Italic
Univers-BoldExtObl
CG Omega Italic
Univers-BoldOblique
CG Times
Univers-Condensed
CG Times Bold 8
Univers-CondensedBold
CG Times Bold Italic
Univers-CondensedBoldOblique
CG Times Italic
Univers-CondensedOblique
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Univers-Extended
Coronet
Univers-ExtendedObl
Courier
Univers-Light
CourierPS
Univers-LightOblique
Courier Bold
Univers-Oblique
Courier Bold Italic
Wingdings
Courier Italic
ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
CourierPS-Bold
ZapfDingbats
CourierPS-BoldOblique
CourierPS-Oblique

8-59

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 8 Optional Equipment

Garamond Antiqua
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Helvetica
Helvetica-Bold
Helvetica-BoldOblique
Helvetica-Narrow
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
Helvetica-Oblique
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
Marigold
NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
Palatino-Bold
Palatino-BoldItalic
Palatino-Italic
Palatino-Roman
Symbol
Symbol IPS
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Times New Roman Italic
Times-Bold
Times-BoldItalic
Times-Italic
Times-Roman
Univers Bold
Univers Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Medium
Univers Medium Italic
Wingdings
ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
ZapfDingbats

8-60

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Appendix

This chapter describes how to perform maintenance and replace ink cartridges and includes
information about machine specifications and consumables, as well as an index.

Maintenance ...........................................................p. 9-2

This section explains the functions available on the [Maintenance]
menu on the [Home1] screen.

About Ink Cartridges .............................................p. 9-4

This section describes how to replace ink cartridges.

Specifications.........................................................p. 9-5
This section describes the basic specifications of the ComColor GD
Series and optional equipment.

Consumables .......................................................p. 9-18

This section describes the specifications of ink cartridges and spare
staples.

Index......................................................................p. 9-19

9
ComColor GD Series User's Guide
 9 Appendix

Maintenance

The following adjustments can be made in the

[Maintenance] menu on the [Home1] screen. Print Head Cleaning
Clean the ink head when you notice a change in
image quality, such as blurring in part of a copy,
white streaking, or faded colors.

• By default, the unit is configured to

automatically perform cleaning every time a
certain number of printouts are made.

[Normal Cleaning]
Cleaning to prevent clogging of the ink heads.
[Strong Cleaning]
[Print Head Cleaning]
Strong cleaning performed when the ink head has
Cleans the ink head.
clogged.
[Front Cover Release]
Releases the lock of the front cover on the machine.
[Paper Guide Control]
Adjusts the position of the paper guides when using the
1 Touch [Maintenance] on the
[Home1] screen.
optional auto-control stacking tray or high capacity

2 Touch [Print Head Cleaning].

stacker.
[Glue Temperature]
The [Print Head Cleaning] screen is displayed.
Checks the temperature of the glue unit when using the
optional Perfect Binder. It is also possible to preheat the
glue unit.
For more information, see the user's guide for the Perfect
3 Select the type of head cleaning.
Binder.
[Maximum Pages per Mail] 4 Touch [OK].
Specify the maximum number of sheets of paper that can
be inserted per mail when using the optional Wrapping
Envelope Finisher.
For more information, see the user's guide for the
Wrapping Envelope Finisher.

9-2

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Maintenance

Front Cover Release Manual Control of Paper Guide

Control
Normally, the front cover of the machine is locked.
The lock will be released in cases when it is You can expand or narrow the positions of the
necessary to open the front cover such as when guides from their positions configured with [Auto].
paper has jammed or when ink has become empty. You can individually adjust the positions of the side
To open the front cover during regular operation, go guides and end guide.
to the [Maintenance] screen and touch [Front Cover
Release]. The lock will be released and you will be
able to open the front cover. 1 Touch [Maintenance] on the
[Home1] screen.
Once the cover has been closed, the lock will
automatically engage as soon as operations start.
2 Touch [Paper Guide Control].
The [Paper Guide Control] screen is displayed.

Paper Guide Control

Adjusts the position of the paper guides when using
3 Adjust
guides.
the position of the paper

the optional auto-control stacking tray or high • To return the adjusted value to 0 mm, touch [Auto].
capacity stacker. • The adjusted value will also return to 0 mm when
It is also possible to manually perform fine the [Power] key on the operation panel is pressed
adjustments of the positions of the side guides and to restart the unit, the [Reset] key is pressed, or
end guide. when the paper size has been changed.
[Auto]
The position of the paper guides are automatically
adjusted to suit the size of paper.
4 Touch [Close].
[Narrower]
The positions of the paper guides are narrowed by 1 mm
(3/64") each towards the inner side of the stacker.
Glue Temperature
[Wider]
Checks the temperature of the glue unit when using
The positions of the paper guides are expanded by 1 mm
the optional Perfect Binder. It is also possible to
(3/64") each towards the outer side of the stacker.
preheat the glue unit.
• Normally, use [Auto].

• With the auto-control stacking tray, the guides

will expand when the paper guide open button is Maximum Pages per Mail
pressed when such as removing paper. For
more information, see "Stacking Tray (Auto- Specify the maximum number of sheets of paper
control Stacking Tray / Wide Stacking Tray)" that can be inserted per mail when using the
(p. 8-13). optional Wrapping Envelope Finisher.

9-3

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 About Ink Cartridges

Ink Cartridge 3 Remove the cap from the new ink

cartridge.
Replacement Affix the removed cap on the old ink cartridge.

When ink runs out, the ink replacement message is

displayed and printing stops. Replace the cartridge
of the color shown.

• Do not remove the ink cartridge until the ink

replacement message is displayed.

• When the remaining amount of ink is low, the

remaining ink indicator on the touch panel
screen flashes. Prepare a new ink cartridge for
the color that flashes. 4 Insert the new ink cartridge.
Position the ink cartridge so that the ▼ mark faces
upward, and insert it until it stops.

1 Open the front cover.

5 Close the front cover.

2 Remove the ink cartridge identified
as empty.
Confirm the color of the ink cartridge.

9-4

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Specifications

■ ComColor GD9630 / GD9630R / GD7330 / GD7330R Specifications

Basic Functions and Print Functions
ComColor GD9630/GD9630R: 63A01
Model Name
ComColor GD7330/GD7330R: 63A03
Type Console
Color Support 5 colors (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Gray)
Print Type Line-type inkjet system
Ink Type Oil-based pigment ink (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Gray)
Standard
Black: 600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning
direction)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) ×
300 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Print Resolution
Fine
Black: 600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning
direction)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) ×
600 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Black: 4 gray levels
Number of Gray Levels
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 12 gray levels
Standard
Black: 600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning
direction)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) ×
300 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
High-definition
Data Processing Resolution
Black: 600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning
direction)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) ×
600 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Line Smoothing
600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Warm-up Time 2 min. 30 sec. or less (at room temperature of 23 ºC (73.4 ºF))
First Print Time 1 5 sec. or less (A4-LEF 7)

9-5

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 9 Appendix

A4-LEF 7 Simplex: 160 ppm Duplex: 80 sheets/minute

Letter- Simplex: 160 ppm Duplex: 80 sheets/minute
LEF
A4 Simplex: 120 ppm Duplex: 60 sheets/minute
ComColor
GD9630/ Letter Simplex: 120 ppm Duplex: 60 sheets/minute
GD9630R Legal Simplex: 104 ppm Duplex: 44 sheets/minute
JIS-B4 Simplex: 102 ppm Duplex: 44 sheets/minute
A3 Simplex: 88 ppm Duplex: 42 sheets/minute
Continuous Ledger Simplex: 86 ppm Duplex: 42 sheets/minute
Print 7
Speed 2 6 A4-LEF Simplex: 130 ppm Duplex: 65 sheets/minute
Letter- Simplex: 130 ppm Duplex: 65 sheets/minute
LEF
A4 Simplex: 104 ppm Duplex: 52 sheets/minute
ComColor
GD7330/ Letter Simplex: 104 ppm Duplex: 52 sheets/minute
GD7330R Legal Simplex: 90 ppm Duplex: 42 sheets/minute
JIS-B4 Simplex: 88 ppm Duplex: 42 sheets/minute
A3 Simplex: 78 ppm Duplex: 38 sheets/minute
Ledger Simplex: 76 ppm Duplex: 37 sheets/minute
Maximum: 340 mm × 550 mm (13 3/8" × 21 5/8")
Standard Tray
Minimum: 90 mm × 148 mm (3 9/16" × 5 27/32")
Paper Size
Maximum: 297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16" × 17")
Feed Tray
Minimum: 182 mm × 182 mm (7 3/16" × 7 3/16")
Printable Area 314 mm × 548 mm (12 3/8" × 21 19/32")
Standard: Margin width of 3 mm (1/8")
Guaranteed Print Area 3
Maximum: Margin width of 1 mm (3/64")
Standard Tray 46 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (12-lb bond to 56-lb bond) (plain paper)
Paper Weight
Feed Tray 52 g/m2 to 104 g/m2 (14-lb bond to 28-lb bond) (plain paper)
Paper Tray Standard Tray Height up to 110 mm (4 5/16")
Capacity Feed Tray Height up to 56 mm (2 3/16") (3 trays)
Output Tray Capacity Height up to 60 mm (2 3/8")
PDL (Page Description Language) RISORINC/C IV
TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPs (TLS), DHCP, ftp, lpr, IPP, SNMP, Port9100
Supported Protocols
(RAW port), IPv4, IPv6, IPSec
Network Interface Ethernet 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (2ch)
Memory Capacity 4 GB
Capacity 500 GB
Hard Disk 4
Available Space Approx. 430 GB
Operating System Linux
Power Source AC 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz - 60 Hz, 12.0 A - 6.0 A
Max. 1,200 W
Ready 5: 150 W or less
Power Consumption
Sleep 8: 4 W or less
Stand-by: 0.5 W or less
Operating Noise Max. 66 dB (A) A4-LEF (Simplex) at the maximum print speed

9-6

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Specifications

Max. 75 dB A4-LEF (Simplex)

A-weighted Sound Power Level 9
Monochrome/Color: 160 ppm
Temperature: 15 ºC to 30 ºC (59 ºF to 86 ºF)
Operating Environment
Humidity: 40% to 70% RH (non-condensing)
In use: 1,220 mm × 725 mm × 1,160 mm (48 1/32" × 28 9/16" ×
45 11/16")
Dimensions (W × D × H)
With cover and tray closed: 1,160 mm × 705 mm × 1,015 mm
(45 11/16" × 27 25/32" × 39 31/32")
Weight Approx. 175 kg (386 lb)
Indoor type, pollution degree 2*, At altitudes of 2,000 m or lower
Safety Information * The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in
the air. Degree "2" corresponds to a general indoor environment.
With the front cover open and the operation panel in the upright
Dimensions When Operating
position: 1,220 mm × 1,240 mm × 1,160 mm (48 1/32" × 48 13/16" ×
(W × D × H)
45 11/16")

1 Within 10 minutes after the last print job

2 When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m2 (23-lb bond)), and standard density setting
Chart used: Print measurement pattern [Color measurement sample 2 (JEITA standard pattern J6)]
3 The margin when printing envelopes is 10 mm (3/8").
The guaranteed area when printing images is the area enclosed within 3 mm (1/8") of the edges of the paper.
4 One gigabyte (GB) is calculated as 1 billion bytes.
5 Without printing and temperature adjustment operation
6 The continuous print speed varies depending on the type of optional output equipment connected.
When using the face down finisher (A4-LEF Simplex)
Without offset:
160 sheets/minute (ComColor GD9630/GD9630R)
130 sheets/minute (ComColor GD7330/GD7330R)
With offset: 125 sheets/minute
When using the high capacity stacker (A4-LEF Simplex)
Without offset:
160 sheets/minute (ComColor GD9630/GD9630R)
130 sheets/minute (ComColor GD7330/GD7330R)
With offset:
110 sheets/minute (ComColor GD9630/GD9630R)
95 sheets/minute (ComColor GD7330/GD7330R)
7 LEF stands for "Long Edge Feed".
8 When setting [Power Consumption (in Sleep)] to [Low]
9 When using plain paper (62 g/m2 (17-lb bond))

9-7

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 9 Appendix

■ ComColor GD9631 / GD9631R Specifications

Basic Functions and Print Functions
Model Name ComColor GD9631/GD9631R: 63A02
Type Console
Color Support 5 colors (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Gray)
Print Type Line-type inkjet system
Ink Type Oil-based pigment ink (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Gray)
Standard
Black: 600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning
direction)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) ×
300 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Print Resolution
High-definition
Black: 600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning
direction)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) ×
600 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Black: 4 gray levels
Number of Gray Levels
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 12 gray levels
Standard
Black: 600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning
direction)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) ×
300 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
High-definition
Data Processing Resolution
Black: 600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning
direction)
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Gray: 300 dpi (main scanning direction) ×
600 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Line Smoothing
600 dpi (main scanning direction) × 600 dpi (sub-scanning direction)
Warm-up Time 2 min. 30 sec. or less (at room temperature of 23 ºC (73.4 ºF))
1
First Print Time 5 sec. or less (A4-LEF 7)
A4-LEF 7 Simplex: 160 ppm Duplex: 80 sheets/minute
Letter- Simplex: 160 ppm Duplex: 80 sheets/minute
LEF
A4 Simplex: 120 ppm Duplex: 60 sheets/minute
Continuous Print Speed 2 6 Letter Simplex: 120 ppm Duplex: 60 sheets/minute
Legal Simplex: 104 ppm Duplex: 44 sheets/minute
JIS-B4 Simplex: 102 ppm Duplex: 44 sheets/minute
A3 Simplex: 88 ppm Duplex: 42 sheets/minute
Ledger Simplex: 86 ppm Duplex: 42 sheets/minute
Maximum: 340 mm × 550 mm (13 3/8" × 21 5/8")
Paper Size Standard Tray
Minimum: 90 mm × 148 mm (3 9/16" × 5 27/32")
Printable Area 314 mm × 548 mm (12 3/8" × 21 19/32")
Standard: Margin width of 3 mm (1/8")
Guaranteed Print Area 3
Maximum: Margin width of 1 mm (3/64")
Paper Weight Standard Tray 46 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (12-lb bond to 56-lb bond) (plain paper)

9-8

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Specifications

Paper Tray Height up to 110 mm (4 5/16")

Standard Tray
Capacity
Output Tray Capacity Height up to 60 mm (2 3/8")
PDL (Page Description Language) RISORINC/C IV
TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPs (TLS), DHCP, ftp, lpr, IPP, SNMP, Port9100
Supported Protocols
(RAW port), IPv4, IPv6, IPSec
Network Interface Ethernet 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (2ch)
Memory Capacity 4 GB
Capacity 500 GB
Hard Disk 4
Available Space Approx. 430 GB
Operating System Linux
Power Source AC 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz - 60 Hz, 12.0 A - 6.0 A
Max. 1,200 W
Ready 5: 150 W or less
Power Consumption
Sleep 8: 4 W or less
Stand-by: 0.5 W or less
Operating Noise Max. 66 dB (A) A4-LEF (Simplex) at the maximum print speed
Max. 75 dB A4-LEF (Simplex)
A-weighted Sound Power Level 9
Monochrome/Color: 160 ppm
Temperature: 15 ºC to 30 ºC (59 ºF to 86 ºF)
Operating Environment
Humidity: 40% to 70% RH (non-condensing)
In use: 1,220 mm × 725 mm × 1,160 mm (48 1/32" × 28 9/16" ×
45 11/16")
Dimensions (W × D × H)
With cover and tray closed: 1,160 mm × 705 mm × 1,015 mm
(45 11/16" × 27 25/32" × 39 31/32")
Weight Approx. 160 kg (353 lb)
Indoor type, pollution degree 2*, At altitudes of 2,000 m or lower
Safety Information * The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in
the air. Degree "2" corresponds to a general indoor environment.
With the front cover open and the operation panel in the upright
Dimensions When Operating
position: 1,220 mm × 1,240 mm × 1,160 mm (48 1/32" × 48 13/16" ×
(W × D × H)
45 11/16")

1 Within 10 minutes after the last print job

2 When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m2 (23-lb bond)), and standard density setting
Chart used: Print measurement pattern [Color measurement sample 2 (JEITA standard pattern J6)]
3 The margin when printing envelopes is 10 mm (3/8").
The guaranteed area when printing images is the area enclosed within 3 mm (1/8") of the edges of the paper.
4 One gigabyte (GB) is calculated as 1 billion bytes.
5 Without printing and temperature adjustment operation
6 The continuous print speed varies depending on the type of optional output equipment connected.
When using the face down finisher (A4-LEF Simplex)
9
Without offset: 160 sheets/minute
With offset: 125 sheets/minute
When using the high capacity stacker (A4-LEF Simplex)
Without offset: 160 sheets/minute
With offset: 110 sheets/minute
7 LEF stands for "Long Edge Feed".
8 When setting [Power Consumption (in Sleep)] to [Low]
9 When using plain paper (62 g/m2 (17-lb bond))

9-9

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 9 Appendix

■ Scanner HS7000 (Optional)

Copy Functions and Scan Functions
Type Flat Bed Scanner with Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Copy mode: Color, Monochrome, Auto, Cyan, Magenta
Scanning Modes
Scan mode: Color, Monochrome, Auto, Grayscale
Scanning Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, or 200 dpi
303 mm × 432 mm (11 15/16" × 17") (when using platen glass)
Maximum Scanning Area
295 mm × 430 mm (11 5/8" × 16 15/16") (when using ADF)
Standard: 300 dpi × 300 dpi
Writing Resolution
Fine: 300 dpi × 600 dpi
Copy Paper Size Maximum: 303 mm × 432 mm (11 15/16" × 17") (equivalent to A3)
Monochrome/Color: 7 sec. or less (when copying A4-LEF/Letter-LEF
First Copy Time
orientation using Color Priority Mode)
Copy Functions
Simplex copying (A4-LEF/Letter-LEF, using ADF): 70 ppm or higher
Copying Speed
Duplex copying (A4-LEF/Letter-LEF, using ADF): 70 ppm or higher
50% to 200% (Copy mode)
Reproduction Size 50% to 200% (Scanner mode, resolution: 200/300 dpi),
only 100% (Scanner mode, resolution: 400/600 dpi)
Original source displacement (capable of scanning both sides of a
Type
document by simultaneous duplex scanning)
Maximum: 297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16" × 17") (equivalent to A3)
Original Size
ADF Minimum: 100 mm × 148 mm (3 15/16" × 5 27/32")
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (14-lb bond to 34-lb bond)
Max. 200 sheets: 80 g/m2 (21-lb bond)
Original Capacity
Height up to 25 mm (1")
Scanning Gray 10-bit input and 8-bit output for each RGB color
Levels
Monochrome/Color: 100 ppm
Scanning Speed * RISO KAGAKU standard original (A4-LEF/Letter-LEF), 300 dpi,
JPEG, PDF, when stored to main unit hard drive
Scan Functions
Network Interface 1 Ethernet 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Data-saving Method 1
Save to main unit hard drive, server, or USB flash drive, or send by e-mail
Monochrome: TIFF, PDF, PDF/A
Data-saving Format 1
Grayscale/Full Color: TIFF, JPEG, PDF, PDF/A

9-10

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Specifications

Power Source AC 100 V - 240 V, 1.2 A - 0.6 A, 50 Hz - 60 Hz

Power Consumption Max. 100 W
Dimensions (W × D × H) 640 mm × 560 mm × 255 mm (25 3/16" × 22 1/16" × 10 1/32")
Weight Approx. 25 kg (55 lb)
Indoor type, pollution degree 2*, At altitudes of 2,000 m or lower
Safety Information * The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust
in the air. Degree "2" corresponds to a general indoor environment.
In use: 1,235 mm × 825 mm × 1,260 mm (48 5/8" × 32 1/2" × 49 5/8")
Dimensions When Operating (when With the front cover open and the operation panel in the upright
connected to main unit) (W × D × H) position: 1,235 mm × 1,345 mm × 1,635 mm (48 5/8" × 52 31/32" ×
64 3/8")

1 Via the internal host controller

9-11

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 9 Appendix

■ Face Down Finisher G10 (Optional)

Type External Unit

Finishing Functions Offset output, staple
Without offset
Maximum: 340 mm × 550 mm (13 3/8" × 21 5/8")
Minimum: 90 mm × 148 mm (3 9/16" × 5 27/32")

Paper Size Offset output

Regular-sized paper width: 182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm ×
431.8 mm (7 3/16" × 10 1/8" - 11 11/16" × 17")
Irregular-sized paper width: 131 mm × 148 mm - 305 mm ×
550 mm (5 3/16" × 5 27/32" - 12" × 21 5/8")
Paper Weight 46 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (12-lb bond to 56-lb bond)
Tray Capacity Height up to 108 mm (4 1/4")
50 sheets* A4, A4-LEF, JIS-B5, JIS-B5-LEF, Letter, Letter-LEF
25 sheets* A3, JIS-B4, Ledger, Legal, Foolscap
Maximum Number of Staples
* When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m2
(23-lb bond))
A3, JIS-B4, A4, A4-LEF, JIS-B5, JIS-B5-LEF, Ledger, Legal, Letter,
Paper Size for Staple
Letter-LEF, Foolscap
52 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (14-lb bond to 56-lb bond)
Paper Weight for Staple
(plain paper, recycled paper)
1 at front side (angle stapling)
Staple Position 1 at rear side (angle stapling)
2 at center (parallel stapling)
Power Source AC 100 V - 240 V, 1.2 A - 0.6 A, 50 Hz - 60 Hz
Power Consumption Max. 110 W
Dimensions (W × D × H) 760 mm × 680 mm × 585 mm (29 15/16" × 26 25/32" × 23 1/32")
Weight Approx. 30 kg (66 lb)
Indoor type, pollution degree 2*, At altitudes of 2,000 m or lower
* The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and
Safety Information
dust in the air. Degree "2" corresponds to a general indoor
environment.
Dimensions When Operating (when 1,440 mm × 1,240 mm × 1,345 mm
connected to main unit) (W × D × H) (56 11/16" × 48 13/16" × 52 31/32")

9-12

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Specifications

■ High Capacity Feeder G10 (Optional)

Type External Unit

Maximum: 340 mm × 465 mm (13 3/8" × 18 5/16")
Paper Size
Minimum: 90 mm × 148 mm (3 9/16" × 5 27/32")
46 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (12-lb bond to 56-lb bond)
Paper Type and Weight
(plain paper, recycled paper, envelopes, postcards)
Tray Capacity Height up to 440 mm (17 11/32")
Power Source AC 100 V - 240 V, 1.0 A - 0.5 A, 50 Hz - 60 Hz
Max. 100 W
Ready 1: 30 W or less
Power Consumption
Sleep 2: 30 W or less
Stand-by: 0.5 W or less
Operating Noise Max. 68 dB (A) A4-LEF (Simplex/duplex) at the maximum print speed
Dimensions (W × D × H) 790 mm × 630 mm × 740 mm (31 1/8" × 24 13/16" × 29 5/32")
Weight Approx. 69 kg (152 lb)
Indoor type, pollution degree 2*, At altitudes of 2,000 m or lower
Safety Information * The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in
the air. Degree "2" corresponds to a general indoor environment.
Dimensions when connected to main 1,565 mm × 1,240 mm × 1,160 mm
unit (W × D × H) (61 5/8" × 48 13/16" × 45 11/16")

1 Without printing operation

2 When setting [Power Consumption (in Sleep)] to [Low].

9-13

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 9 Appendix

■ High Capacity Stacker G10 (Optional)

Type External Unit

Finishing Functions Collating, stacking (offset)
Maximum: 340 mm × 460 mm (13 3/8" × 18 1/8")
Minimum: 90 mm × 148 mm (3 9/16" × 5 27/32")
Paper Size Offset: 90 mm × 182 mm - 340 mm × 432 mm (3 9/16" × 7 3/16" -
13 3/8" × 17")
(Envelopes are not acceptable.)
46 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (12-lb bond to 56-lb bond)
Paper Type and Weight
(plain paper, recycled paper, postcards)
Collating: Height up to 440 mm (17 11/32") 1
Tray Capacity
Offset: Height up to 405 mm (15 15/16") 2
Power Source AC 100 V - 240 V, 1.4 A - 0.7 A, 50 Hz - 60 Hz
Max. 140 W
Ready 3: 30 W or less
Power Consumption
Sleep 4: 30 W or less
Stand-by: 0.5 W or less
Operating Noise 68 dB (A) or less A4-LEF (Simplex/duplex) at the maximum print speed
Dimensions (W × D× H) 1,000 mm × 700 mm × 960 mm (39 3/8" × 27 9/16" × 37 13/16")
Weight Approx. 135 kg (298 lb)
Indoor type, pollution degree 2*, At altitudes of 2,000 m or lower
Safety Information * The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in
the air. Degree "2" corresponds to a general indoor environment.
Dimensions when connected to main 2,210 mm × 1,315 mm × 1,160 mm
unit (W × D × H) (87 1/32" × 51 25/32" × 45 11/16")

1 Height up to 110 mm for A5, postcards, envelopes, non-regular size paper

2 Not applicable to A5, postcards, envelopes, non-regular size paper, etc.
3 Without printing operation
4 When setting [Power Consumption (in Sleep)] to [Low].

9-14

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Specifications

■ Multifunction Finisher FG10 (Optional)

Type External Unit

Top Tray Collating, stacking
Tray Type Stacking Tray Collating, stacking (offset)
Booklet Tray Booklet, Paper folding
Maximum: 330 mm × 488 mm (13" × 19 3/16")
Top Tray 1
Minimum: 100 mm × 148 mm (3 15/16" × 5 27/32")
Maximum: 330 mm × 488 mm (13" × 19 3/16")
Stacking Tray 1
Minimum: 182 mm × 182 mm (7 3/16" × 7 3/16")
Paper Size
Maximum: 297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16" × 17") (equivalent to A3)
Stapling
Minimum: 203 mm × 182 mm (8" × 7 3/16")
Maximum: 330 mm × 457 mm (13" × 18")
Booklet Tray 1
Minimum: 210 mm × 280 mm (8 1/4" × 11")
Top Tray 52 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (14-lb bond to 56-lb bond)
Stacking Tray 52 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (14-lb bond to 56-lb bond)
Paper Weight
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 (16-lb bond to 24-lb bond)
Booklet Tray
(cover: 60 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (16-lb bond to 56-lb bond))
Top Tray Height up to 50 mm (1 15/16")
Tray Capacity Stacking Tray Height up to 200 mm (7 7/8")
Booklet Tray Height up to 50 mm (1 15/16")
Maximum Number of 100 sheets A4, A4-LEF, JIS-B5-LEF, Letter, Letter-LEF
Staples 2 65 sheets A3, JIS-B4, Ledger, Legal, Foolscap
Maximum: 297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16" × 17") (equivalent to A3)
Paper Size
Stapling Minimum: 203 mm × 182 mm (8" × 7 3/16") (equivalent to JIS-B5-LEF)
1 at front side (angle stapling),
Staple Position 1 at rear side (angle stapling 3, parallel stapling),
2 at center (parallel stapling)
2 holes, 3 holes
Number of Punches
2 holes, 4 holes
2 holes: A3, JIS-B4, A4-LEF, A4, JIS-B5-LEF, Ledger, Legal, Letter-
Punching LEF, Letter
Paper Size
3 holes: A3, JIS-B4, A4-LEF, JIS-B5-LEF, Ledger, Letter-LEF
4 holes: A3, A4-LEF, Ledger, Letter-LEF
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 (14-lb bond to 53-lb bond)
Creating a Center margin: 15 sheets (60 pages)
Maximum Number of
Booklet (Center 2-fold: 5 sheets (20 pages)
Sheets 2 4
margin/2-fold)
Power Source AC 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz - 60 Hz, 2.0 A - 1.0 A
Power Consumption Max. 175 W 9
Operating Noise 68 dB (A) or less
(when using multifunction finisher)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 1,120 mm × 765 mm × 1,130 mm (44 3/32" × 30 1/8" × 44 1/2")
Weight Approx. 131 kg (289 lb)

9-15

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 9 Appendix

Indoor type, pollution degree 2*, At altitudes of 2,000 m or lower

Safety Information * The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust
in the air. Degree "2" corresponds to a general indoor environment.
In use:
2,520 mm × 765 mm × 1,160 mm (99 7/32" × 30 1/8" × 45 11/16")
With folder unit
Dimensions With cover, and tray extended:
(when connected 2,520 mm × 1,340 mm × 1,160 mm (99 7/32" × 52 3/4" × 45 11/16")
to main unit) In use:
(W × D × H) 2,315 mm × 765 mm × 1,160 mm (91 5/32" × 30 1/8" × 45 11/16")
Without folder unit
With cover, and tray extended:
2,315 mm × 1,280 mm × 1,160 mm (91 5/32" × 50 13/32" × 45 11/16")

1 When color printing on paper that is longer than 432 mm (17"), the image printed beyond 432 mm (17") may be distorted.
2 When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m2 (23-lb bond))
3 Rear-side angle stapling is only available for A4-LEF and A3.
4 Includes an added cover.

9-16

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Specifications

■ Folder Unit FG10 (Optional)

Z-fold 1 A3, JIS-B4, Ledger

Paper Size of Tri-fold A4, Letter
Fold (Outer Tri-fold/Inner
Tri-fold)
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 (16-lb bond to 24-lb bond)
Paper Weight of Fold
(plain paper, recycled paper)
Tri-fold Output Tray Capacity 2 Approx. 30 sheets
Number of sheet per Fold 1 sheet
Dimensions (W × D × H) 210 mm × 622 mm × 1,002 mm (8 1/4" × 24 15/32" × 39 14/32")
Weight Approx. 40 kg (88 lb)

1 When printouts are output to the stacking tray, maximum height up pages differ according to the paper size.
(A3 paper: 30 pages, JIS-B4 paper: 20 pages)
2 When using plain paper and recycled paper (85 g/m2 (23-lb bond))

■ IC Card Authentication Kit II (Optional)

Applicable Card ISO 14443 TypeA/TypeB/FeliCa/Mifare

Type RFID system
Power Source Power supplied from the USB port
Temperature: 15 ºC to 30 ºC (59 ºF to 86 ºF)
Operating Environment
Humidity: 40% to 70% RH (non-condensing)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 93 mm × 65 mm × 19 mm (3 21/32" × 2 9/16" × 3/4") (excluding protruding parts)
Weight Approx. 90 g (3 oz)
Indoor type, pollution degree 2*, At altitudes of 2,000 m or lower
Safety Information * The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air.
Degree "2" corresponds to a general indoor environment.

■ PS Kit FG10 (Optional)

PS Kit FG10 is not supported in some regions.
Compatible Printers ComColor GD series
Type RIP option
PostScript Level3 (CPSI:3019) 1
PDL (Page Description PDF (1.7)
Language) PCL 5c, PCL 6 (PCL XL) 2
TIFF (6.0) 3
TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPs (TLS), DHCP, ftp, lpr, IPP, SNMP, Port9100 (RAW port), IPv4,
Supported Protocols
IPv6, IPSec 9
PS: 136 Roman fonts and 2 Japanese fonts
Installed Fonts
PCL: 88 Roman fonts

1 Genuine Adobe engine

2 RISO shall not provide any PCL printer driver. For PCL output, available functions differ from printing via PS printer driver. When you
need the functions not available for PCL output, print via PS printer driver.
3 For TIFF output, available functions differ from printing via PS printer driver.

9-17

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Consumables

It is recommended that you use the consumable products listed below.

Consumable specifications and types are subject to change without notice.
For pricing information, please contact your dealer or authorized service representative.

Ink Cartridges

Type Color Quantity Unit

ComColor GD Ink Cartridge Cyan
Magenta
Yellow NET. 1,000 ml
Gray
Black
ComColor GD Ink Cartridge (E) Cyan
Magenta
Yellow NET. 1,000 ml
Gray
Black
1 piece
ComColor GD Ink Cartridge R Cyan
Magenta
Yellow NET. 1,000 ml
Gray
Black
ComColor GD Ink Cartridge R (E) Cyan
Magenta
Yellow NET. 1,000 ml
Gray
Black

Use the ink cartridge within 24 months from the date of manufacture (when preserved under room temperature).
For optimal printing quality, we recommend that you use the ink cartridge as soon as possible after purchase.
You can find the date of manufacture on the ink cartridge.

Staple Cartridge
Spare staples for face down finisher G10.

Type Quantity
ComColor Staple 50 15,000 Pieces/Box

9-18

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

Index
A during printing ................................................ 3-3
Changing the login password .......................... 30, 6-8
Active/idle screen .......................................... 36, 6-12 Check setting .............................................1-32, 2-11
Add cover ................................................... 1-27, 3-23 Checking the current status of a job .......................36
Adding a large amount of paper ..........................8-12 Checking the detailed count .................................. 6-7
Adding the paper .................................................8-11 Chroma ............................................................... 3-25
Additional copy ....................................................1-31 Clear key .................................................................14
Address book Clearing defaults ................................................. 1-34
adding to the address book ...........................2-12 Collated ......................................................1-11, 3-10
editing the address book ...............................2-13 Color mode ............................................ 1-7, 2-7, 3-9
Address/destination ...............................................2-3 Color profile ................................................3-12, 8-50
ADF ......................................................................... 13 Combine .....................................................1-15, 3-15
ADF original guide .................................................. 13 Consumables ...................................................... 9-18
ADF original output tray .......................................... 13 Consumables screen ...................................... 25, 6-6
ADF original unit lever ............................................ 13 Contrast .............................................................. 3-25
ADF scan & pause ...............................................1-12 Copies ..............................................17, 20, 24, 3-10
Admin menu button ................................................. 15 Copy screen ............................................................17
Admin menu screen ................................................ 25 Corrugator ..................................................8-18, 8-19
Advanced tab .......................................................3-28 Custom menu .............................................1-33, 2-12
Auto image rotation .................................... 1-30, 8-40 Custom paper entry ............................................ 3-32
Auto-control stacking tray ....................................8-13 Cyan ...............................................................1-7, 3-9

B D
Barcode Data compression ............................................... 3-24
barcode area definition .................................3-26 Data lamp ................................................................14
installing the Barcode Area Definition Software Date stamp .................................................1-18, 3-19
.........................................................................7-2 Date/time .................................................................15
operating the Barcode Area Definition Software Dedicated carriage .....................................8-18, 8-22
.........................................................................7-4 Deleting an address or a destination .................. 2-13
printing barcode originals ................................7-8 Destination ............................................................ 2-3
Base color level ......................................... 1-22, 2-10 Document name ..................................... 2-6, 4-9, 5-8
Basic tab ................................................................3-9 Dot process ................................................1-20, 3-25
Between jobs .......................................................3-22 Double-feed check ................................................ 1-8
Between sorts ......................................................3-22 Downloading scanned jobs to a computer ............ 6-9
Bi-fold ......................................................... 8-30, 8-40 Draft .................................................................... 3-24
Binding .................................................................8-35 Duplex/simplex ..................................... 1-11, 2-8, 3-9
Binding edge ......... 1-27, 3-20, 8-7, 8-31, 8-38, 8-40
Binding margin ................................... 1-28, 8-7, 8-39 E
Black ...................................................... 1-7, 2-7, 3-9
Blank page detection ...........................................3-30 Editing button order ............................................. 1-35
Book shadow erasure .................................. 1-13, 2-9 Eject button ......................................................... 8-26
Booklet ....................................................... 1-16, 3-16 Entering text ............................................................28
Booklet binding .......................................... 8-32, 8-48 Envelope
Booklet cover .......................................................8-33 envelope imaging ......................................... 3-27
Booklet tray ..........................................................8-26 printing on envelopes .......................................32 9
Envelope guide ..................................................... 8-8
C Envelope guide angle adjustment lever ................ 8-8
Envelope guide paper feed pressure adjustment lever
Canceling copying .................................................1-3 ............................................................................... 8-8
Card-IJ .................................................................3-12 Environment tab .................................................. 3-31
Center margin ............................................ 8-33, 8-36 Error diffusion ...................................................... 3-25
Change setting screen ............................................ 20 Error lamp ...............................................................14
Changing settings External system link ............................................ 3-36
during copying .................................................1-4 External system link screen ....................................24

9-19

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 9 Appendix

F Installing the printer driver .......................................35

Interrupt copy ...................................................... 1-30
Face down finisher .................................................8-2 Interrupt key ............................................................14
Face down finisher socket .....................................8-2
Face down tray ....................................................... 12 J
Face up/down .................................. 8-16, 8-25, 8-41
Favorite shortcuts ................................................... 16 Jam release cover ................................................. 8-2
Favorites ..............................................................1-31 Job comment ...................................................... 3-28
adding to favorites ............................... 1-33, 3-14 Job icon ...................................................................36
editing favorites .............................................1-33 Job list .....................................................................36
Favorites tab ........................................................3-14 Job name ............................................................ 3-28
edit favorites ..................................................3-14 Job status key .........................................................14
list ..................................................................3-14
Feed tray ................................................................. 13 L
File format for saving the scanned data .................2-7
Finished screen ............................................ 37, 6-12 Layout tab ........................................................... 3-15
Fold ............................................................ 8-30, 8-39 Left cover ...................................................8-18, 8-26
Fold direction ............................................. 8-31, 8-40 Left to right .......................................................... 3-16
Folder entry ..........................................................3-34 License info screen ......................................... 26, 6-8
Folder unit ............................................................8-26 Lightness ............................................................. 3-25
FORCEJET™ link icon ........................................... 15 Line smoothing .................................................... 3-24
Form data screen .................................................8-54 Load screen ........................................................ 6-11
Form overlay ........................................................8-50 Loading the next copy job ..................................... 1-3
Front cover ...................................................... 13, 8-8 Loading the paper
Front cover release ................................................9-3 feed trays .........................................................31
Full color ................................................ 1-7, 2-7, 3-9 high capacity feeder ....................................... 8-9
Function keys .......................................................... 14 standard tray ....................................................32
Login .......................................................................30
G Login/logout key ......................................................14

Gamma correction ..................1-21, 2-10, 3-25, 8-49 M

Get printer info .....................................................3-34
Grayscale ...............................................................2-7 MAC address ........................................................ 6-6
Machine info screen ................................................26
H Magenta .........................................................1-7, 3-9
Main power lamp .....................................................14
Halftone ...............................................................3-25 Main power switch ..................................................13
HDD usage ............................................................. 21 Main unit .................................................................12
Head cleaning .............................................. 6-13, 9-2 Main unit socket ......................................................13
High capacity feeder ..............................................8-8 Maintenance ......................................................... 9-2
High capacity feeder socket ...................................8-8 Maintenance button ................................................15
High capacity stacker ...........................................8-18 Maintenance menu screen .................................. 6-13
High capacity stacker socket ...............................8-18 Maintenance screen ................................................25
High-quality ..........................................................3-12 Matt coated ......................................................... 3-12
Home key ................................................................ 14 Mixed size original ............................. 1-13, 2-9, 3-11
Home1 screen ........................................................ 15 Mixed size Z-fold ................................................. 8-40
Home2 screen ........................................................ 16 Mode buttons ..........................................................15
Multifunction finisher ........................................... 8-26
I Multi-part paper printing ...................................... 3-30

IJ paper ................................................................3-12 N
Image control ............................................. 1-21, 2-10
Image position ........................................... 1-22, 3-19 Numeric keys ..........................................................14
Image quality ............................................. 1-20, 3-24
Image repeat .............................................. 1-16, 3-16 O
Image shift ...........................................................8-48
Image tab .............................................................3-24 Offline icon ..............................................................15
Ink cartridges ............................................... 9-4, 9-18 Offset output ..............................................8-23, 8-34
Inner tri-fold ................................................ 8-30, 8-40 Offset output (program) ...................... 8-6, 8-24, 8-35

9-20

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Index

Offset output (separation) .................. 8-6, 8-24, 8-37 R

Online/offline ........................................................3-35
Operation panel ............................................... 13, 14 Remaining amount of ink ........................................15
Orientation ...........................................................3-10 Removing printouts ............................................. 8-19
Original cover .......................................................... 12 Reproduction size ........................................1-7, 2-10
Original orientation ......................1-10, 2-8, 8-7, 8-38 Reset key ................................................................14
Original size .........................................................3-10 Resolution ............................................................. 2-8
Original type ..................................... 1-20, 2-10, 3-24 Reverse order ..................................................... 8-54
Outer tri-fold ............................................... 8-30, 8-40 Right cover .................................................8-18, 8-26
Output method ........................................... 3-13, 8-47 Right to left .......................................................... 3-16
Output tray .................... 8-16, 8-23, 8-25, 8-35, 8-41 RISO Console
Output tray relay common button operations ............................. 6-5
............................ 8-16, 8-17, 8-24, 8-25, 8-35, 8-41 login ................................................................ 6-4
Overlay ................................................................1-23 starting the RISO Console ............................. 6-4
Owner ..................................................................3-28 Rotation ............................................................... 3-20
Owner name ..........................................................2-6
S
P
Sample copy ....................................................... 1-32
Page border .........................................................1-19 Save as a file ...................................................... 3-13
Page size ...............................................................2-9 Save to USB drive ............................................... 3-13
Page split ..................................................... 1-14, 2-9 Saving as default ................................................ 1-34
Page stamp ................................................ 1-18, 3-18 Scan menu screen ................................................ 6-9
Paper arrangers ...................................................8-13 Scan screen ............................................................18
Paper feed guide levers .................................. 13, 8-8 Scanner ...................................................................12
Paper feed pressure adjustment lever ............ 12, 8-8 Scanner lamp ..........................................................12
Paper guide .........................................................8-18 Scanning level ..............................................1-12, 2-8
Paper guide (end) ................................................8-13 Scanning size ...............................................1-10, 2-7
Paper guide (side) ...............................................8-13 Screening ............................................................ 3-25
Paper guide control ................................................9-3 Search ................................................................... 6-5
Paper guides open button ....................................8-13 Separating books ............................. 8-33, 8-36, 8-49
Paper selection ......................................................1-8 Separation ........................................................... 1-27
Paper size ............................................................3-11 Setting a large amount of paper .......................... 8-11
Paper tray ............................................................3-12 Slip sheet ...................................................1-25, 3-22
changing the paper tray setting .......................1-8 Slow printing ..............................................1-29, 3-30
Paper tray relay ...................................................1-30 SNMP community name ..................................... 3-31
Paper type ................................................... 1-9, 3-12 Sort ............................................................1-11, 3-10
Performing maintenance Specifying a custom paper size .......................... 3-11
during copying .................................................1-4 Specifying a custom size .................................... 3-10
during printing .................................................3-4 Stacking tray ............................ 8-2, 8-18, 8-22, 8-26
PIN code ...................................................... 2-9, 3-28 Stacking tray descent button ............................... 8-18
Platen glass ............................................................ 12 Stacking tray setting position ................................ 8-2
Power key ............................................................... 14 Stamp .........................................................1-17, 3-18
Power-saving features ............................................ 29 Standard tray ..........................................................12
Preview before saving ...........................................4-9 adding or switching the paper ..........................33
Preview before sending .......................................2-11 Standard tray descent button .......................... 12, 8-8
Print and pause ....................................................3-10 Standard tray padding covers ......................8-8, 8-10
Print density ............................................... 1-12, 3-24 Standard tray paper guide .............................. 12, 8-8
Print head cleaning ................................................9-2 Staple ......................................... 8-4, 8-7, 8-28, 8-37
Print menu screen ................................................6-10 Staple cartridge ..................................................... 8-2 9
Print screen ............................................................. 19 Staple cover .......................................................... 8-2
Printer configuration .............................................3-32 Staple function and loading orientation of the paper
Printer driver screen ..............................................3-5 ......................................................................8-5, 8-29
Program ..................................................... 1-24, 3-28 Start key ..................................................................14
PS kit ...................................................................8-42 Stop key ..................................................................14
Punch ......................................................... 8-30, 8-37 Stopper ...................................................................31
Storage ............................................................... 3-13
Storage screen ........................................................20
Storage, load
change setting .............................................. 4-10

9-21

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Chapter 9 Appendix

copy to folder ................................................4-11 Watermark .......................................................... 3-17

copy to USB drive .........................................4-11 Wide stacking tray ............................................... 8-13
search ...........................................................4-10
settings ............................................................4-7 Z
view screen ...................................................... 21
Storage, save Z-fold ..........................................................8-31, 8-40
add folder ........................................................4-9 Zoom ................................................................... 3-11
save document ................................................4-8
save document screen ..................................... 21
settings ............................................................4-5
view screen ...................................................... 20
System info button .................................................. 15
System info screen ......................................... 25, 6-6

T
Tab .........................................................................3-5
Text stamp ................................................. 1-19, 3-19
Top side left .........................................................1-10
Top side up ..........................................................1-10
Top tray ................................................................8-26
Top/bottom ...........................................................3-16
Touch panel ..................................................... 14, 27
Transfer cover ........................................................8-8
Tray selection per page .......................................8-47
Tri-fold output tray ................................................8-26
Tri-fold output tray button .....................................8-26

U
Uncollated .................................................. 1-11, 3-10
USB port ................................................................. 13
USB screen ............................................................. 22
USB, load
change setting .................................................5-9
change setting screen ...................................... 24
copy to folder ..................................................5-9
settings .................................................. 5-6, 8-56
view screen ...................................................... 23
USB, save
save document ................................................5-7
save document screen ..................................... 23
settings ............................................................5-5
view screen ...................................................... 22
User info screen .............................................. 26, 6-7
User name .............................................................. 15

V
Version .................................................................3-30
Via shared printer ................................................3-31
View balance .......................................................... 26
View selection .....................3-35, 4-8, 4-10, 5-7, 5-8

W
Waiting job list screen ............................................. 19
Wake on LAN .......................................................3-31
Wake up key ........................................................... 14

9-22

ComColor GD Series User's Guide

 Please contact the following for supplies and service:

2017/11

© Copyright 2017 RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION